Skip to main content

Full text of "Kingia"

See other formats


KINGIA 

Volume 1 Number 1 



1988 


ISSN 0819-1247 


Western Australian Herbarium 


ISSN 0819-1247 


KINGIA 

Volume 1 Number 1 
1987 


54609-1 


Western Australian Herbarium 
Department of Agriculture, Western Australia 


INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS 


Preparation of manuscripts 

1. All material should be double spaced and typed on A4 paper. 

2. Two copies of each manuscript, including all tables and figures, should be 
submitted. 

3. Tables and figures should be photoreduced to A4 size if larger. Originals should be 
held by the author until requested by the Editor. 


Use of word processors 

Authors using a word processor should submit one copy containing their personal choice 
of print mode, e.g. italic, bold, underline, and one copy in plain text, entirely free of 
underlining and special type. They should further indicate whether a disc could be made 
available later for printing and. if so, the make and model of machine. References should 
quote titles of periodicals, bulletins and reports in full. 


CONTENTS 


Page 

Collections of Lawrencia Hook, destroyed by fire, April 1984. By N. S. Lander. 1 
Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss. By N. S. Lander. 9 
The distribution of introduced Rumex (Polygonaceae) in Western Australia. 

By J. Moore and J. K. Scott 21 

Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park, Western Australia: tloristics and 

nutrient status. By W. Foulds 27 

Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod. By J. P. Tyler 49 

Time between germination and first flowering of some perennial plants. 

By B. G. Muir 75 

The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia R.Br. 

(Goodeniaceae). By D. A. Morrison 85 


Editorial Board 

J. W. Green (Editor) 
G. Perry 
B. L. Koch 
M. E. Lawrence 
K. F. Kenneally 

Editorial Assistant 

J. W. Searle 


Western Australian Herbarium, George Street, South Perth, 
Western Australia 6151 


KINGIA 


This new journal Kingia replaces the former Western Australian Herbarium Research 
Notes, of which 12 numbers were issued between 1978 and 1986. Though different in for- 
mat and arranged in volumes and parts, Kingia will follow closely the content and edi- 
torial policy df its predecessor, containing papers on the flora and vegetation of Western 
Australia. Taxonomic contributions should be directed to the Herbarium’s journal 
Nuytsia. 

The title Kingia was chosen for a number of reasons. Its cover depicts Kingia, an ar- 
borescent monocotyledon, endemic in Western Australia; it was drawn by the foun- 
dation editor of Research Notes, Dr Roger Hnatiuk, and so provides a link between the 
old journal and the new. Kingia was first observed near Albany in 1801 by Robert 
Brown, who named it in honour of his friend, the surveyor-explorer Captain Phillip 
Parker King, and also in memory of Captain Philip Gidley King, a Governor of New 
South Wales who supported botany. 

A counterpart of our new journal is the ecological journal of the New South Wales 
National Herbarium, Cunninghamia, named in honour of botanist Allan Cunningham 
who was Superintendent of the Sydney Botanic Garden in 1837. In view of the associ- 
ation of Cunningham with Phillip Parker King on expeditions between 1817 and 1822, 
including Western Australia, it is particularly appropriate that the titles of the two 
journals should parallel the historic association of King and Cunningham. 


Available from 
The Information Branch 
Department of Agriculture 
Baron-Hay Court, South Perth 
Western Australia 6151 


Kingia 1(1): 1-8 (1987) 


1 


Collections of Lawrencia Hook, destroyed by fire, April 1984 


N. S. Lander 

Western Australian Herbarium, George Street, South Perth, Western Australia 6151 


Abstract 

Lander, N. S, Collections of Lawrencia Hook, destroyed by fire, April 1984. Kingia 1(1): 1-8 (1987), Label 
details of specimens of Lawrencia from MEL and HO destroyed in a road accident in April 1984 are provided. 
Available data includes locality, date of gathering, collector’s name and field numbers, species identification 
and sheet number for each lost specimen. 


Introduction 

Following the completion of my revision of the genus Lawrencia Hook. (Lander 1985), 
collections on loan to PERTH from HO and MEL were destroyed in their entirety on 
4th April 1984 when the truck in which they were contained was gutted by fire near 
Eucla on the Nullarbor Plain. 

In the course of my study, a comprehensive index to specimens examined was main- 
tained. Thus it has been possible to provide the following collection details. For each 
specimen, the locality, date of gathering, collector’s name and field number (where these 
were noted on the original label) as well as the location of duplicates in other herbaria 
are recorded. Further, the species identification in accordance with my revision is also 
indicated. 

Amongst the specimens from MEL lost were several types: namely, two possible 
isotypes of Plagianthus berthae F. Muell., an isotype of Lawrencia glomerata Hook., 
seven syntypes of Plagianthus spicatus var. pubescens Benth., two isotypes of 
Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq., ten syntypes of Halothamnus microphyllus F. 
Muell., a svntype of Plagianthus helmsiiF. Muell. & Tate, the holotype of Plagianthus 
monoicus Helms ex Ewart. Further syntypes are held elsewhere for all the lost syntypes; 
the appropriate lectotypes have been selected in all cases. The single lost holotype has 
an isotype at AD which has been designated as a lectotype (Lander 1985). 

In the following list, entries are arranged alphabetically by collector’s surname. 
Species numbers (the first number appearing in parenthesis) are those used in my re- 
vision of Lawrencia: namely, 

1. Lawrencia berthae (F. Muell.) Melville 

2. Lawrencia spicata Hook. 

3. Lawrencia glomerata Hook. 

4. Lawrencia viridi-grisea Lander 

5. Lawrencia buchananensis Lander 

6. Lawrencia cinerea Lander 

7. Lawrencia densiflora (E. G. Baker) Melville 

8. Lawrencia repens (S. Moore) Melville 

9. Lawrencia diffusa (Benth.) Melville 

10. Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq. 

11. Lawrencia chrysoderma Lander 

12. Lawrencia helmsii (F. Muell. & Tate) Lander 


2 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Specimens Destroyed from the National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL) 

Mouth of the Glenelg River, Viet., s.dat., W. Alitt, s.n. (2-MEL 98761). 

Ooldea, S.A., 1880, Anonymous s.n. (3 MEL 98716). 

Shark Bay W.A., Oct. 1877, Anonymous (4 MEL 98704). 

Robertsons Brook, Duke of Orleans Bay, W.A.,33° 55’ S, 122° 20’ E, s.dat., Anonymous (10 MEL 98805). 
Wimmera, Viet., s.dat.. Anonymous (10 MEL 98775). 

S.loc., s.dat. Anonymous (10 MEL 98809). 

Murray River, Nov. 1905, Anonymous (10 MEL 98778). 

Port Gawler, S.A., s.dat., Anonymous (10 MEL 98807). 

Shark Bay W.A., Oct. 1877, Anonymous (7 MEL 98655 and 98657). 

S.loc., s.dat.. Anonymous (1 MEL 98642). 

Trial Bay, W.A., between the mill lake and the flour mill, s.dat., Anonymous (9 MEL 98762). 

Mallagata Inlet, s.dat.. Anonymous (2 MEL 98747). 

S.loc., s.dat.. Anonymous (2 MEL 98756). 

S.loc., s.dat., Anonymous (3 MEL). 

South W.A., s.dat.. Anonymous (10 MEL 98797). 

Lake Austin, ca 330 km NE of Geraldton, W.A., 7 Aug. 1970, A. M. Ashby 3705 (12 MEL 98767). Duplicate: 
AD. 

Eucla, W.A., 1886, J. D. Batt 64 (3 MEL 98715). 

Eucla, W.A., 1886, J. D. Batt s.n. (3 MEL 98691). 

Eucla, W.A., 1887, J. D. Batt 38 (3 MEL 98707). 

Eucla. W.A., 1887, J. D. Batt s.n. (10 MEL 98799). 

Eucla, W.A., 1889, J. D. Batt s.n. (10 MEL 98806). 

Eucla, W.A.. 1890. J. D. Batt s.n. (10 MEL 98800). 

Cobham salt lake, N.S.W.. s.dat.., W. Bauerlen 256 (3 MEL). 

Cobham salt lakes, N.S.W., Sept. 1887, W. Bauerlen 254 (10 MEL 98801, 98813). Duplicate: NSW. 

Hattah Lakes National Park. Viet., Oct. 1948, A. C. Beauglehole 989 (10 MEL). 

Raak Salt Plain, W of Nowingi, Viet., Sept. 1966, A. C. Beauglehole 16088 (3 MEL). 

London Bridge area, Port Campbell National Park, Sept. 1966, A. C. Beauglehole 21349 (2 MEL 529353). 

Wyperfeld National Park, Rubble Lake, S of Pirro Dune, Viet.. Oct. 1968, A. C. Beauglehole 29357 (3 MEL). 

Smaller island near Goat Island, Mallacoota Inlet National Park, Viet.. Dec. 1969, A. C. Beauglehole 31285 (2 
MEL 527061). 

Goat Island, Mallacoota Inlet National Park, Viet., Dec. 1969, A. C. Beauglehole 32165 (2 MEL 527062). 

3.2 km ENE of Mallacoota Post Office, Mallacoota Inlet National Park, Viet., Dec. 1969. A. C. Beauglehole 
33027 (2 MEL 527073). 

Lake Corangamite, Wool Wool area, Jan. 1964, A. C. Beauglehole 39124 (2 MEL 529352). 

Hattah Lakes National Park, NW of Hattah Lake, Viet., Oct. 1960, A. C. Beauglehole 39209 (3 MEL). 

Hattah Lakes National Park, Lendrook Plain. Oct. 1960, A. C. Beauglehole 39210 (10 MEL). 

Pink Lakes, 16 km NNW of Underbool, ca 48 km W of Ouyen Post Office, Viet.. Sept. 1972, A. C. Beauglehole 
40390 (10 MEL). 

22 miles NW of Underbool Post Office, 43 miles WSW of Hattah Post Office, Underbool Tank, Viet., Sept. 
1972, A. C. Beauglehole 40453 (10 MEL). 

Raak salt plains 9 miles NNW of Hattah Post Office, Viet., Oct. 1972, A. C. Beauglehole 40583 (10 MEL 
529793). 


N. S. Lander, Collections of Lawrencia destroyed by fire 


3 


Raak Salt Plains, S end near mallee area 10 miles VV of Hattah Post Office, Viet., Oct. 1972, A. C. Beauglehole 
40592 (3 MEL). 

Little Desert. Watchegatcheca. Viet., Nov. 1949, A. C. Beauglehole 42985 (3 MEL). 

Little Desert. Watchegatcheca, Viet,. Oct. 1948, A. C. Beauglehole 42987 (3 MEL). 

Little Desert. Watchegatcheca. Viet.. Oct. 1948, ,4. C. Beauglehole 42993, (10 MEL 529363). 

North West Mallee Study Area, Towan Plains Flora and Fauna Reserve, ca 26 km SW of Manangatang Post 
Office, Viet,, April 1977, A. C. Beauglehole 55731 (3 MEL). 

Mallee Study Area. Annuello, ca 23 km NNW of Manangatang Post Office. Viet,, April 1977. A. C. Beauglehole 
55867 (3 MEL). 

Mallee studv area. Annuello, ca 23 km NNW Manangatang Post Office, Viet.. April 1977, A. C. Beauglehole 
55955 (10 MEL). 

Mt Conner. N.T., Sept. 1947, J. M. Bechervaise s.n. (3 MEL 98661). 

Sources of Thomson River, Qld., 1871, C. W. Birch s.n. (3 MEL 98703). 

Between Barring Downs & Muellers Range, W.A., s.dat., C. W. Birch s.n. (3 MEL 98705). 

St Helens, Tas., April 1922, R. A. Black s.n. (2 MEL). 

Israelite Bay. W.A., 1885, S. T. C. Brooks (as 'S. Brooke’) s.n. (10 MEL 98793). 

Israelite Bay. W.A., 1893, S. T. C. Brooks (as 'Mrs Brookes') s.n. (1 MEL 98651). 

Israelite Bay, W.A., 1883, Miss Brooks (as 'Miss Brooke’) s.n. (3 MEL 98698). 

Israelite Bay, W.A.. 1884. Miss Brooks (as ’Miss Brooke’) s.n. (3 MEL 98697). 

Upper Gascoyne River, W.A., 1890, C. D. Brown s.n. (7 MEL 98673). 

South Coast, Van Diemans Land (Tas.), 1802, R. Brown 5110 (2-MEL).Duplicates: BM, CANB, K. 

Port Arthur, Tas., 1892 and 1893. Rev. J. Button s.n. (2 MEL 98740 and 98734). 

Nullarbor Plain, ca 50 miles S of Ooldea towards Colona, near salt lagoons, S.A., 26 Sept. 1955, H. W. Caulfield 
146a (3 MEL). 

Pink Lake State Park, Purnya reference area, Viet., Dec. 1980, P. D. C. Cheat s.n. (10 MEL 580047). 

Palm Valiev. N.T.. 24° 04’ S, 132° 45' E, Sept. 1963, G. M. Chippendale 10611 (3 MEL). Duplicates: AD, BRI, 
CANB. K, NSW. PERTH. 

Palm Valley. N.T.. 24° 04’ S, 132° 45’ E. Sept. 1963. G. M. Chippendale 10612 (3 MEL). Duplicates: AD. 
CANB'. NSW. 

SW Australia, s.dat., W. Clarke s.n., (2 MEL 98758). 

Lake Eyre. S.A., Aug. 1971, M. G. Corrick 5027 (3 MEL 98815). 

Beside Owen Hwy ca 5 km E of Murravville. Viet., 35° 16’ S, 141° 15’ E, 28 Aug. 1979, M. G. Corrick 6239 (1 
MEL). 

Big Desert, 13 km S of Murravville on Nhill road, Viet., 35° 25’ S, 141° 14’ E, Oct. 1979, M. G. Corrick 6367 
(1 MEL). 

Big Desert, SE of Murravville on East - West road. 4 km S of Murrayville and 4 km E of junction with Nhill 
- Murrayville road, Viet., 35° 17’ S, 141° 14’ E, Oct. 1979, M. G. Corrick 6380 (1 MEL). 

Far NW, ca2 km S of Sunset Tank, Viet., 34° 58’ S, 141° 30’ E, April 1980, M. G. Corrick 6656, (10 MEL). 

Lake Austin, W.A., 27° 35’ S, 117° 55’ E. April 1978, L. A. Craven 5033 (3 MEL 572424). Duplicates: BRI, NT, 
PERTH. 

Between W end of Great Australian Bight and Victoria Springs, W.A., s.dat., Crawford 39 (10 MEL 98798). 

Between W end of Great Australian Bight and Victoria Springs, W. A., s.dat., Crawford 48, (10 MEL 98802). 

Perth, W.A., s.dat., M. D. Crisp 1231 (10 MEL). 

Northern Plains 30 km SSW of Mildura, 9 km S of Benetook along Meridian Rd, Viet., 34° 26’ S, 142° 00’ E, 
Oct. 1977, M. D. Crisp 3295 (10 MEL). Duplicate: CBG. 

Northern Plains, 46 km N of Mildura, Raak Plain. 3 km S of NW corner, Viet., 34° 36’ S, 141° 57’ E, Oct 1977 
M. D. Crisp 3417 (3 MEL). Duplicate: CBG. 

Between the Upper Blackwood River and Lake Lefroy, W.A., 1893, M. Cronin s.n., (1 MEL 98664 & 98648). 


4 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Lake Wagin, W.A., 1890, M. Cronin s.n. (3 MEL 98694). 

Lake Weering (as “Lake Waringa’’), Viet., 3 Oct. 1860, J. Dallachy 237 (3 MEL 98687 pro pte.): a syntype of 
Plagianthus spicatus var. pubescens Bent.h. [- Lawrencia glomerata Hook.]. 

Lake Weering (as “Lake Waringa”), Viet., 3 Oct. 1860, J. Dallachy 238 (3 MEL 98685): a syntype of 
Plagianthus spicatus var. pubescens Benth. [= Lawrencia glomerata Hook.]. 

Loutitt Bay, Viet., s.dat., J. Dallachy [as “Dalachi”] s.n. (2 MEL 98743). Duplicate: NSW, PERTH. 

Wimmera District, Viet., Oct, 1889, St E. D’Alton s.n. (3 MEL 98679). 

Pineplains, Viet,, s.dat., St E. D'Alton 16 (3 MEL 98683). 

Swan River, W.A., 1843, J. Drummondbb (3 MEL 98714): an isotype of Lawrencia glomerata Hook. The holo- 
type is held at K; further isotypes are at BM and PERTH. 

Swan River, W.A., 1845, J. Drummond 208 (10 MEL). Duplicates: BM, K, PERTH. 

Swan River, W.A., s.dat., J. Drummond 252 (10 MEL 98808). Duplicates: BM, K. 

Port Gregory, W.A., s.dat., J. Drummond s.n. (4 MEL 98692). 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat,, J. Drummond s.n. (1 MEL 98649). 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat., J. Drummond s.n. (2 MEL 98729, 98730 and 98754). Duplicate: K. 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat., J. Drummond s.n. (10 MEL 98772). 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat., J. Drummond s.n. (10 MEL 98781). 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat,, J. Drummond s.n. (10 MEL 98795). 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat., J. Drummond s.n. (10 MEL 98771). 

New Haven, Lake Bennett, N.T., 22° 46’ S, 131° 00' E, May 1972, C. Dunlop 2541 (3 MEL). Duplicates: AD, 
NT. 

Murray River, 1892, J P. Eckert s.n. (10 MEL 98779). 

Little River, (location uncertain), s.dat,, I. Filligan 3 (2 MEL 98748). 

20 miles W of Emu, S.A., 3 Sept. 1956, N. Forde 479 (3 MEL). Duplicates: AD, NT. 

W.A., 18° 16’ S, 122° 04’ E, 1879, A. Forrest s.n. (3 MEL 98706). 

Pierre Springs, W.A., 7 June 1874, J. & A. Forrest s.n. (3 MEL 98711). 

S.loc., W.A., 28 June 1874, J. & A. Forrest s.n. (3 MEL 98712). 

Mt Moore, W.A., 30 June 1874, J. & A. Forrest s.n. (3 MEL 98710). 

Minilya (as ’Manilyalya’), N of Shark Bay, W.A., 1882, J. Forrest s.n. (3 MEL 98660). 

Altona, Viet,, April 1923, C. French Jnr s.n., (3 MEL). 

Lake Eyre, S.A., 1872-74, W. E. P. Giles s.n. (3 MEL 98696). 

Great Australian Bight, 1875, W. E. P. Giles s.n. (10 MEL 98796). 

Upper Ashburton River, W.A., 1876, W. E. P. Giles s.n. (3 MEL 98695). 

Mt Murchison, W.A., 1876, W. E. P. Giles s.n. (3 MEL 98731). 

S.loc., W.A., 1876, W.E. P. Giles s.n. (6 MEL 98708). 

Near Coolgardie W.A., May 1909, Prof. Gregory s.n. (12 MEL 98766). 

Rigby Island S of Kalinina, Viet., 37° 56’ S. 147° 57’ E, Aug. 1928, P.K. Gullan 384 (2 MEL 573090). 

E bank of the Swan River, W.A., 1889, M. Heal s.n. (1 MEL 98650). 

Fraser Range, W.A., Sept. 1891. R. Helms s.n. (1 MEL 98641). 

Hunts Slate Well, W.A., 9 Nov. 1891. R. Helms s.n. (9 MEL 7605542). Duplicates: AD, K. 

Lake Deborah, W.A., Nov. 1891, R. Helms s.n. (MEL): the holot.ype of Plagianthus monoicus Helms ex Ewart. 

| = Ricinocarpus velutinusF. Muell.]; two isotypes are held at AD from which a lectotype has been chosen. 

Lake Lefroy, W.A. 1891, R. Helms s.n. (12 MEL 571607). Duplicate: AD. 

Lake Lefroy. W.A., 7 Nov. 1891, R. Helms s.n. ( 12 MEL): a syntype of Plagianthus helmsii F. Muell. & Tate 
[= Lawrencia helmsii (F. Muell. & Tate) N. S. Lander], A duplicate of this collection at AD has been 
chosen as a lectotype; isolectotypes are held at K and NSW. A further syntype is held at AD. 


N. S. Lander, Collections of Lawrencia destroyed by fire 5 

Lake Bennet, N.T., 22° 47’ S, 131° 01’ E, Jan. 1972, N. W. Henry 378 (4 MEL 89670). 

S.loc, W.A., April 1896, N. 0. Holst s.n. (12 MEL 571605). 

Brachina Gorge, Oraparinna National Park, Flinders Range, S.A., Sept. 1971, E. N. S. Jackson 1835, (10 
MEL). 

Napperby Station N.T., 22° 51’ S, 132° 33’ E, Jan. 1972, P. K. Latz 1971 (3 MEL 98671). Duplicate: CANB. 

Dalhousie Springs, S.A., 26° 27’ S, 135° 28’ E, April 1974, P. K. Latz 4797 (10 MEL). Duplicates: AD, BH, 
PERTH. 

S of Mongrel Downs Station, S.A., 20° 56’ S, 129° 24’ E„ Aug. 1976, P. K. Latz6561 a & b (3 & 4 MEL). Dupli- 
cate: NT. 

Clarke Island, Tas., 1894, E. Maclaine s.n. (2 MEL 98741). 

Lake Neale N.T., 24° 28’ S, 130° 13’ E, Aug. 1973, J. R. Maconochie 1891 (4 MEL). Duplicates: AD, CANB, 
CGB, NT. 

Lake Neale, N.T., 24° 28’ S, 130° 13’ E, 28 May 1973, J. R. Maconochie 1893 (3 MEL). Duplicates: AD, NT. 

Margate, Tas., Sept. 1924, M. D. Maddox s.n. (2 MEL 98753). 

Wyperfield National Park, Viet., 1959, J. O. Maroske s.n. (3 MEL 98664). 

Gardners River, W.A., s.dat., G. Maxwell s.n. (1 MEL 98635, 98636): possible isotypes of Plagianthus berthae 
F. Muell. [- Lawrencia berthae (F. Muell.) Melville]. The holotype is held at K; a further possible isotype 
is at M. 

Puttingup, W.A., s.dat., G. Maxwell s.n. (10 and 11 MEL 98794). 

SW Australia, s.dat., G. Maxwell s.n. (1 MEL 98643). Duplicate: K. 

Ca0.5 miles ENE of Southern Cross, around salt pans, Aug. 1952, R. Melville 219 (10 MEL). Duplicate: K. 

Salt Lake near Kiatta, Viet., Sept. 1952, R. Melville 988 (10 MEL). Duplicate: K. 

14 4 miles N of Kalgoorlie, W.A., July 1953, R. Melville 4011 (3 MEL 98768). Duplicates: AD, BRI, K. NSW, 
PERTH. 

Near Mt Moore, W.A., 1889, E. Merrall s.n. (8 MEL 98699). 

Parkers Range, W.A., 1890, E. Merrall s.n. (1 MEL 98646, 98477). 

Parkers Range, W.A., 1890, E. Merrall s.n. (8 MEL 98693). 

Parkers Range, W.A., 1892, E. Merrall s.n. (1 MEL 98653). 

Junction of the Murray and Darling Rivers Viet. & N.S.W., Oct. 1887, J. Minchin s.n. (3 MEL 98680). 

Claremont, W.A., Feb. 1903, A. Morrison s.n. (2 MEL 98765). Duplicates: BM, CANB. 

Murray Desert, Viet,, 14 Oct. 1835, F. Mueller s.n., (3 MEL): A syntype of Plagianthus spicatus var. pubescens 
Benth. [= Lawrencia glomerata Hook.]. 

Holdfast Bay, S.A., Dec. 1850, F. Mueller s.n. (2 MEL 98721, 98722, 98723, 98757). 

Yarra River, Viet.. Nov. 1852, F. Mueller s.n. (2 MEL 98762). 

On the Reedy Lake, Murray River, Jan. 1854, F. Mueller s.n. (3 MEL 98720). 

Spencers Gulf. S.A., Oct. 1857., F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 98812, 98790, 584132): syntypes of Plagianthus 
microphyllus F. Muell. [= Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq.]. 

Spencers Gulf near Port Pirie, S.A., Oct. 1857, F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 584133): a syntype of Plagianthus 
microphyllus F. Muell. [=• Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq.]. 

Salt bush plain just north of Stirling Range, W.A., Oct. 1867. F. Mueller s.n., (10 MEL 98804). 

Shark Bay, W.A., Oct. 1877, F. Mueller s.n. (4 MEL 98704). 

S.loc., s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (3 MEL 98683). 

Lake Hindmarsh, Viet., s.dat,, F. Mueller s.n. (3 MEL 98684, 98686, 98687 pro pte): syntypes of Plagianthus 
spicatus var. pubescens Benth. [= Lawrencia glomerata Hook.]. A duplicate of this collection held at 
NSW has been selected as a lectotype; there is an isolectotype at BM. 

S.loc., s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (3 MEL 98688). 

Lake Hindmarsh. Viet., s.dat,, F. Mueller s.n. (3 MEL 98689). 

S.loc., s.dat, F. Mueller s.n. (3 MEL 98710). 


6 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


S.loc., s.dat, F. Mueller s.n. (3 MEL 98712). 

Guichen Bay, S.A., s.dat... F. Mueller s.n. (2 MEL 98725, 98755). 

Port Gawler, S.A., s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (2 MEL 98732). 

Mallagata. (location uncertain), s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (2 MEL 98747). 

Lake Victoria, N.S.W., s.dat.. F. Mueller s.n. (2 MEL 98763). Duplicate: K. 

S.loc., s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 98775). 

Seaflats on the Murray River, S.A.. s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 98787): a syntype of Plagianthus 
microphvllus F. Muell. [= Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq.]. 

Murray River, s.dat.. F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 98788, 98789): a syntype of Plagianthus microphvllus F. Muell. 
[- Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq.]. A duplicate of this collection at K has been chosen as a lectotype; 
there is an isolectotype at BM. 

Murray, s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 98791): a syntype of Plagianthus microphyllusF. Muell. [- Lawrencia 
squamata Nees ex Miq.]. Duplicate: K. 

Spencers Gulf. S.A.. s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 98812). 

Between Guichen Bay and Lake Albert, S.A.. s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 584131 pro pt.e.): a syntype of 
Plagianthus microphvllus F. Muell. [= Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq.]. 

Guichen Bay, S.A., s.dat., F. Mueller s.n. (10 MEL 584131 pro pte). 

Dimboola, Viet., 1947, E. T. Muir A.C.B. 42987 (3 MEL). 

Dimboola, Viet., 1947, E. T. Muir A.C.B. 42994 (10 MEL 529364). 

Dimboola, Viet., 1948, E. T. Muir s.n, (3 MEL 98678). 

Lake, 1 mile W. Central Mt Wedge, N.T., 22° 45’ S, 132° 09’ E, June 1968. .4. O. Nicholls 818 (3 MEL). Dupli- 
cates: AD, CANB. K. NT, PERTH. 

Port Gregory, W.A., s.dat., A. Oldfield s.n. (4 MEL). Duplicate: K. 

45 km SW. of Mongrel Downs Homestead, N.T., Aug. 1970, S. Parker 280 (4 MEL 98667). Duplicates: AD, 
K, NT. 

Near Lake Hindmarsh, Viet., Nov. 1968, J. D. M. Pearson 2024 (3 MEL). 

Gascoyne River, W.A., 1882, J. Polak (as "Pollack") s.n. (3 MEL 98660). 

Southern River, Perth, Sept. 1841, J.A.L. Preiss 1231 (10 MEL 584100, 584134): isotypes of Lawrencia 
squamata Nees ex Miq.: the holotype is at LD. Southern River is a branch of the Canning River, near pre- 
sent day Thornlie. 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat., J. A. L. Preiss 2381 (2 MEL). 

S.loc., W.A., s.dat., J. A. L. Preiss 2387 (2 MEL). 

S.loc., March 1895. F. M. Reader 2 (3 MEL 98702). 

Polkemmet near river Wimmera. Viet., Dec. 1895, F. M. Reader 8 (2 MEL 98744, 98745). 

Lowan, Viet,., Oct. 1895, F. M. Reader s.n. (10 MEL 98776). 

Polkemmet, Viet., Nov. 1898, F. M. Reader s.n. (3 MEL). 

NW of Dimboola, Viet., Nov. 1892, J. Reader 5 (10 MEL 98777). 

S.loc., March 1895, J. Reader 8 (10 MEL 98774). 

Wimmera. N.S.W., March 1895, J. Reader s.n. (3 MEL 98677). 

Between Eucla and Fowlers Bay. 1875, T. Richards s.n. (10 MEL 98810). 

Near Fowlers Bay, S.A.. 1875, T. Richards s.n. (10 MEL 98811). 

Eucla, W.A., 1877, T. Richards s.n. (3 MEL 98709, 98676). 

Fowlers Bay, S.A.. 1800, A. F. Richards 4 (3 MEL 98690, 98670). 

Pedinga, S.A., 1880, A. F. Richards s.n. (3 MEL 98701). 

Fowlers Bay, S.A., s.dat., A. F. Richards s.n. (3 MEL 98674). 

Fowlers Bay, S.A., s.dat., A. F. Richards s.n. (3 MEL 98700). 


N. S. Lander, Collections of Lawrencia destroyed by fire 7 

Lake Reserve Gippsland Lakes, Viet.., Feb. 1960, H. Ritman s.n. (2 MEL 98752). 

5.6 km along road which runs W of Sunset Tank * Merrinee road, Viet., 34° 44' S, 141° 38’ E, Sept. 1980, P. S. 
Short 1185 (3 MEL). Duplicates: AD, CBG. 

10 miles S of Broad Arrow, W.A., Sept, 1966, R. V. Smith 517 (12 MEL 571582). 

Barwidge road, 10 miles S of Yelma turn-off. Eremean Province. W.A., 1 Sept. 1958. N. H. Speck 1346 (10 
MEL). Duplicates: AD. BRI. K, NSW. 

24 miles W of Yelma, Ereamean Province, W.A., 26° 33’ S, 121° 22’ E, 11 Sept. 1958, N. H. Speck 1435 (3 
MEL). Duplicates: AD, CANB. 

S.loc., Tas., s.dat.. G. F. Sotry s.n. (2 MEL 98742, 584112). 

Murchison River, W.A. 1895, V. Streich s.n. (3 MEL 98767). 

Wimmera District. Viet., Oct. 1905, C. S. Sutton s.n. (2 MEL 98746). 

4 miles W of Ardrossan on Maitland Road, Yorke Peninsula, S.A., July 1879, J. G. O. Tepper 82 (1 MEL 
98640). 

4 miles W of Ardrossan on Maitland Road, Yorke Peninsula, S.A., July 1879, J. G. O. Tepper 444 (1 MEL 
98639). 

S.loc., s.dat., J. G. 0. Tepper 756 (2 MEL 98739). 

Earles Farm, Kangaroo Island, S.A., s.dat,. J. G. O. Tepper 880 (2 MEL 98735). 

Yorke Peninsula, S.A., s.dat., J. G. O. Tepper 916 (3 MEL 98675). 

Yorke Peninsula, S.A., 1880, J. G. O. Tepper 932 (2 MEL 98675). 

Kangaroo Island, S.A., s.dat., J. G. O. Tepper 1209 (2 MEL 98737). 

Maitland Road, Yorke Peninsula, S.A., Jan. 1880, J. G. O. Tepper s.n. (1 MEL 98654). 

S.loc., s.dat., J. G. O. Tepper s.n. (1 MEL 98637, 98638). 

Ooldea, S.A., 1880, Teitkens s.n. (3 MEL 98716). 

Lake Tyers, Viet., April 1977, J. Turner s.n. (2 MEL 537665). 

Upper Murchison River. W’.A., 1892, I. Tyson s.n. (7 MEL 98658). 

S.loc., 1893, I. Tyson 18 (10 MEL 98792). 

St Francis Island, ca 60 km SW of Ceduna, S.A., 11 Jan. 1971, N. M. Wace 219 (3 MEL). Duplicate: AD. 
Near Annuello, Viet,, Sept. 1971, R. Wade s.n. (10 MEL 98785). 

Rabbit Island, Mallacoota Inlet, Viet., Oct. 1948, N. A. Wakefield 2243 (2 MEL 1509247). 

Trial Bay, W.A.. s.dat., Maj. P. E. Warburton s.n. (2 MEL 98724). 

Trial Bay. W.A., s.dat.. Maj. P. E. Warburton s.n. (3 MEL): a syntype of Plagianthus spicatus var. pubescens 
Benth. [- Lawrencia glomerata Hook.]. 

Lake Eyre Basin - South, ca 150 km W of Marree on the road to Oodnadata, S.A., June 1968, J. Z. Weber 774 
(3 MEL). Duplicate: AD. 

Point Cook, Viet., Jan. 1902, G. Weindorfer 222 (2 and 3 MEL 581579). 

Murchison River, W.A., 1892, A. Weston s.n. (7 MEL 98656). 

Flinders Island, Bass Strait, Tas., Oct. 1966, J. Whinray 17 (2 MEL 521242). 

Theringa, S.A., s.dat., C. Wilhelmi s.n. (2 MEL 98738). 

Coffin Bay, S.A., s.dat., C. Wilhelmi s.n. (2 MEL 98719). 

Port Lincoln, S.A., s.dat., C. Wilhelmi s.n. (10 MEL 98770). 

Lake Hamilton, Port Lincoln, S.A., Jan. 1852, C. Wilhelmi s.n. (10 MEL 98814). 

8 miles S of White Wells, S.A., Aug. 1947, J. H. Wallis s.n. (10 MEL 98780). 

Colona Homestead. S.A.. 50 miles E of Head of Great Australian Bight, Aug. 1947, J. H. Willis s.n. (10 MEL 
98782). Duplicate: K. 

Gypsum workings, 4 miles SW of Nowingi, Viet., Aug. 1955, J. H. Willis s.n. (3 MEL 98672). 

Mildura Viet., Oct. 1932, W.J. Zimmer s.n. (1 MEL 98652). 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Specimens Destroyed from the Tasmanian Herbarium (HO) 

Flinders Island, Tas., 1956, Anonymous (2 HO 12972). 

Boomer Marsh, Dunalley, Tas., Jan. 1944, W. M. Curtis s.n. (2 HO 12983). 

Ralphs Bay Canal, Tas., Jan. 1946, IV. M. Curtis s.n. (2 HO). 

Ralphs Bay Canal, Tas., Dec. 1946, W. M. Curtis s.n. (2 HO). 

Browns River Kingston, Tas., April 1953, W. M. Curtis s.n. (2 HO 29653). 

Ralphs Bay Canal, towards Sandford, Tas., Feb. 1966, IV. M. Curtis (2 HO 29655). 

Georges Bay, N of St Helens, Tas., 1893, W. V. Fitzgerald s.n. (2 HO 12974). 

Ralphs Bay (43° Of S, 147° 26’ E), Tas., Feb. 1930, F. H. Long 137 (2 HO 12980). 

Ralphs Bay, Tas., Jan. 1930, F. H. Long s.n. (2 HO 12979). 

Flinders Island, Tas., Feb. 1844, J. Milligan s.n. (2 HO 12977). 

Double Creek, on main road between OrfordandTriabunna, Tas., Feb. 1976, J. W. Parham s.n. (2 HO 12976). 
Georges Bay, Tas., s.dat. L. Rodway s.n. (2 HO 12978). 

Georges Bay, N of St Helens, Tas.. Jan. 1897, L. Rodway s.n. (2 HO 12975). 

Coles Bay, Tas., April 1930, L. Rodway s.n. (2 HO 12982). Duplicate: K. 

The Neck, South Arm, Tas., Dec. 1960, J. Somerville s.n. (2 HO 12970). 


Acknowledgements 

I am particularly grateful to Mr R.M. Olive for technical assistance in the compilation 
of this list. 


Reference 

Lander, N. S. (1985). Revision of the Australian genus Lawrencia Hook. (Malvaceae: Malveae). Nutysia 5 (2): 
201-271. 


Kingia 1(1): 9-19 (1987) 


9 


Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss 


N. S. Lander 

Western Australian Herbarium, George Street, South Perth, Western Australia 6151 


Abstract 

Lander, N. S. Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss. Kingia 1(1): 9-19 (1987). 
All specimens of Asteraceae collected by J. A. L. Preiss during his visit to West ern Australia from 1838 to 1842 
located in herbaria at Lund (LD) and Geneva (G) are listed. For each specimen the original Preiss field collec- 
tion number (if cited) and the number under which it is recorded in Lehmann's “Plantae Preissianae are 
noted as well as its type status, location and current name. 

Of a total of 117 Preiss Asteraceae specimens located at LD, 57 are types of taxa described in “Plantae 
Preissianae"’. Of 80 such specimens held at G, 40 are types. 

Preiss specimens of Olearia species located at CGE, CO, FL,K,L, MEL, P and WRSL and are also listed. 
It is suggested that the extent of Preiss specimens represented at K may be far greater than has hitherto been 
realised. 


Introduction 

In the course of my year as Australian Botanical Liaison Officer at Kew, 1984-5, I 
visited several European herbaria, principally in order to examine specimens of Olearia , 
the genus I am currently revising. In herbaria at the Botaniska Museum, Lund (LD) and 
the Conservatoire et Jardin Botaniques, Geneva (G) I am confident that I have located 
all, or nearly all of the specimens of Asteraceae collected by the German naturalist 
Johann August Ludwig Preiss during his visit to Western Australia from 1838 to 1842. 
Since a large proportion of these specimens are types of taxa described in J. G. C. 
Lehmann’s “Plantae Preissianae” (1844-8) I present the following list of my findings as 
being of general interest. 


PREISS 

FIELD 

NUMBER 

PL. PREISS. 
NUMBER 

(a) TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 

(b) CURRENT NAME 

0010 

_i 

(3) p . „ , 

(b) Olearia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

0058 

_i 

(a) G 

(b) Sonchus oleraceus L. 

0112 

_i 

(a) G 

(b) Brachycome iberidifolia Benth. 

0149 

_i 

(a) G 

(b) Senecio glossanthus (Sonder) Belcher 

0151 

_i 

(a) G 

(b) Olearia homolepis (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

0152 

_i 

(a) G 

(b) Helipterum heteranthum Turcz. 

0154 

_i 

(a) G 

(b) Podolepis canescens Cunn. ex DC. 


10 

PREIS! 

FIELD 

NUMB 

0155 

0156 

0157 

0162 

0163 

0902 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


PL. PREISS. (a) TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 
NUMBER (b) CURRENT NAME 


1 (a) G 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) Graham 

- 1 (a) G 

(b) Helipterum tenellum Turcz. 

1 (a) G 

(b) Helipterum chlorocephalum (Turcz.) Benth. 

- 1 (a) G 

(b) Myriocephalus nudus A. Gray 

- 1 (a) G 

(b) Pluchea squarrosa Benth. 

- 1 (a) G 

(b) Senecio lautus ssp. maritimus Ali 

- 1 (a) LD 

(b) Senecio ramosissimus DC. 

- 1 (a) LD 

(b) Waitzia aurea (Benth.) Steetz 

- 2 (a) 

(b) Brachycome radicans Steetz 

- 2 (a) Eurybia aspera Steetz - holo: MEL 

(b) Olearia strigosa (Steetz) Benth. 

- 2 (a) 

(b) Helichrysum macranthum Benth. 

- 2>3 (a) 

(b) Lagenifera stipitata (Labill.) Druce [as Lagenophora gracilis Steetz] 

(a) Pithocarpa major Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Pithocarpa pulchella Lindley 

- 2 (a) 

(b) Schoenia cassiniana (Gaudich.) Steetz [as Schoenia oppositifolia 
Steetz 

(a) Waitzia acuminata Steetz - syn: LD 

(b) Waitzia acuminata Steetz 

0001 (a) G. LD 

(b) Helichrysum macranthum Benth. 

0002 (a) G, LD 

(b) Waitzia aurea (Benth.) Steetz 

0003 (a) G, LD 

(b) Helichrysum bracteatum (Vent.) Andrews 

0004 ex parte (a) LD 

(b) Helichrysum bracteatum (Vent.) Andrews 

0004 ex parte (a) LD 

(b) Waitzia aurea (Benth.) Steetz- 

0005 (a) G, LD 

(b) Waitzia aurea (Benth.) Steetz 

0006 (a) Waitzia s teetziana Lehm. - holo: LD, iso: G 
(b) Waitzia citrina (Benth.) Steetz 


0007 


(a) Waitzia sulphurea Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Waitzia citrina (Benth.) Steetz 


N.S. Lander, Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss 


11 


PREISS PL. PREISS. 

FIELD NUMBER 

NUMBER 

(a) TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 

(b) CURRENT NAME 

0008 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Waitzia aurea (Benth.) Steetz 

0009 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Waitzia aurea (Benth.) Steetz 

0010 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Waitzia citrina (Benth.) Steetz 

0011 

(a) Helipterum niveum Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Helipterum niveum Steetz 

0158 0012 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Waitzia suaveolens (Benth.) Druce 

0013 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Waitzia suaveolens (Benth.) Druce 

0014 

(a) Anisolepis pyrethrum Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Helipterum pyrethrum (Steetz) Benth. 

0015 

(a) Waitzia hrevirostris Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Waitzia citrina (Benth.) Steetz 

0016 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Helipterum cotula (Benth.) DC. 

0017 

(a) Helipterum cotula var. simplex Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Helipterum cotula (Benth.) DC. 

0018 

(a) Helipterum simplex Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Helipterum cotula (Benth.) DC. 

0019 

(a) Hyalospermum glutinosum Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Helipterum hyalospermum F. Muell. ex Benth. 

0020 

(a) Hyalospermum strictum Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Helipterum hyalospermum F. Muell. ex Benth. 

0021 

(a) Helipterum citrinum Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Helipterum cotula (Benth.) DC. 

0022 

(a) LD 

(b) Helichrysum semipapposum (Labill.) DC. 

0023 

(a) G. LD 

(b) Helichrysum semipapposum (Labill.) DC. 

0024 

(a) Pteropogon spicatus Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Helipterum spicatum (Steetz) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

0025 2 

(a) 

(b) Helichrysum apiculatum (Labill.) D. Don [as Chrysocephalum 
flavissimum (DC.) Steetz] 

0026 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Helichrysum ramosum DC. 

0027 

(a) LD 

(b) Pithocarpa achilleoides P. Lewis & Summerh. 

0028 

(a) Ozothamnus lepidophyllus Steetz non J.D. Hook. - syn: LD, isosyn: 
G (see Burbidge 1958) 

(b) Helichrysum lepidophyllum (Steetz) Benth. 

0029 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Helichrysum cordatum DC. 

0030 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Angianthus cunninghamii (DC.) Benth. 


12 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


PREISS 

FIELD 

NUMBER 

PL. PREISS. 
NUMBER 

(a) TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 

(b) CURRENT NAME 

- 

0031 

(a) Leucophyta brownii var. candidissima Steetz - types: G, LD 

(b) Calocephalus brownii (Cass.) F. Muell. 

' 

0032 2 

(a) 

(b) Calocephalus brownii (Cass.) F. Muell. [as Leucophyta brownii var. 
virescens Steetz] 

- 

0033 

(a) LD 

(b) Pseudognaphalium luteo-album (L.) Hilliard & B.L. Burtt 


0034 

(a) LD 

(b) Pseudognaphalium luteo-album (L.) Hilliard & B.L. Burtt 


0035 

(a) Pterochaeta paniculata Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Waitzia paniculata (Steetz) F. Muell. ex Benth. 


0036 

(a) FI-W, G, LD 

(b) Angianthus micropodioides (Benth.) Benth. 


0037 

(a) Phyllocalymma filaginoides Steetz - isolecto: FI-W, G, LD (see Short 
1981a). 

(b) Angianthus micropodioides (Benth.) Benth. 

- 

0038 

(a) Skirrhophorus preissianus Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Short 1981a) 

(b) Angianthus preissianus (Steetz) Benth. 

- 

0039 

(a) Pogonolepis stricta Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Short 1968) 

(b) Pogonolepis stricta Steetz 

0826 

0040 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Siloxerus humifusus Labill. 

- 

0041 

(a) Styloncerus cylindraceus Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Short 1981b) 

(b) Siloxerus humifusus Labill. 

- 

0042 

(a) Styloncerus suberectus Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Short 1981b) 

(b) Siloxerus humifusus Labill. 

- 

0043 

(a) LD 

(b) Helipterum corymbosum (A. Gray) Benth. 

0161 

0044 

(a) Pachysurus angianthoides Steetz - type: FI-W, G, LD 

(b) Calocephalus angianthoides (Steetz) Benth. 

- 

0045 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Chrysocoryne pusilla (Benth.) Endl. 

- 

0046 4 

(a) 

(b) Gnaphalium [as Gnaphalium involucratum var. undulatum Steetz] 

- 

0047 4 

(a) 

(b) Gnaphalium [as Gnaphalium involucratum var. planifolium Steetz] 

- 

0048 4 

(a) G 

(b) Helichrysum lindleyi H. Eichler 

- 

0049 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Helipterum manglesii (Lindley) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

- 

0050 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) R. Graham 

- 

0051 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) R. Graham 


0052 2 

(a) 


(b) Podolepis cancescens A. Cunn. ex DC. [as Podolepis aristata var. 
chrysantha (Endl.) Steetz] 


N.S. Lander, Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss 


13 


PREISS 

FIELD 

NUMBER 

PL. PREISS. 
NUMBER 

(a) TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 

(b) CURRENT NAME 


0053 

(a) Podolepis rosea var. mollissiwa Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Davis 
1957) 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) R. Graham 

- 

0054 

(a) Podolepis subulata Steetz - syn: LD, isosyn: G (see Davis 1957) 

(b) Podolepis canescens A. Cunn. ex DC. 

0569 

0055 

(a) Podolepis rosea Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Burbidge 1957) 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) R. Graham 

- . 

0056 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) R. Graham 

- 

0057 

(a) Podolepis filiformis Steetz - syn: LD, isosyn: G (see Davis 1957) 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) R. Graham 

- 

0058 

(a) Podolepis nutans Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Davis 1957) 

(b) Podolepis nutans Steetz 

- 

0059 

(a) LD 

(b) Podolepis lessonii (Cass.) Benth. 

- 

0060 4 

( a ) 

(b) Podolepis canescens Cunn. ex DC. [as Podolepis aristata Benth.] 

- 

0061 

(a) Podolepis rosea var. mollissima Steetz - lectopara: LD (see Davis 1957) 

(b) Podolepis gracilis (Lehm.) R. Graham 

- 

0062 

(a) LD 

(b) Angianthus tomentosus Wendl. 

0548 

0063 

(a) CGE, G, K, L, LD, MEL, P 

(b) Olearia rudis (Benth.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

- 

0064 

(a) LD 

(b) Microseris scapigera (Sol. ex Cunn.) Schultz - Bip. 

- 

0065 

(a) Athrixia australia Steetz - syn: LD, isosyn: G (see Kroner 1980) 

(b) Asteridea pulverulenta Lindley 

0545 

0066 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Millotia myosotidifolia (Benth.) 

- 

0067 

(a) Millotia robusta Steetz - syn: LD, isosyn: G (see Schodde 1963) 

(b) Millotia myosotidifolia (Benth.) Steetz 

- 

0068 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Millotia tenuifolia Cass. 

- 

0069 

(a) Chrysodiscus niveus Steetz - type: G, LD 

(b) Asteridea nivea (Steetz) Kroner 

0180 

0070 4 

(a) Senecio cygnorum Steetz - type: G 

(b) Senecio ramosissimus DC. 

- 

0071 

(a) LD 

(b) Chrysocoryne pusilla (Benth.) Endl. 

- 

0072 

(a) Siemssenia capillaris Steetz - isolecto: LD (see Davis 1957) 

(b) Podolepis capillaris (Steetz) Diels 

- 

0073 

(a) LD 

(b) Senecio quadridentatus Labill. 

- 

0074 

(a) Eurybia paucidentata var. glabrata Steetz - syn: LD, MEL, isosyn: G, P 

(b) Olearia paucidentata (Steetz) Benth. 

- 

0075 

(a) LD, MEL 


(b) Oleaiia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


14 

PREISS 

FIELD 

NUMBER 


0147 


0032 


PL. PREISS. 
NUMBER 

(a) 

(b) 

0076 

(a) 

(b) 

0077 2 

(a) 

(b) 

0078 

(a) 

(b) 

0079 

(a) 


(b) 

0080 ex parte 

(a) 

(b) 

0080 ex parte 

(a) 


(b) 

0081 

(a) 

(b) 

0082 

(a) 

(b) 

0083 

(a) 

(b) 

0084 

(a) 

(b) 

0085 

(a) 

(b) 

0086 

(a) 

(b) 

0087 

(a) 

(b) 

0088 1 ' 2 

(a) 

(b) 

0089 

(a) 

(b) 

0090 

(a) 

(b) 

0091 

(a) 

(b) 

0092 

(a) 

(b) 

0093 

(a) 


(b) 

0094 5 

(a) 

(b) 

0095 

(a) 


(b) 

0096 

(a) 


(b) 


TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 
CURRENT NAME 


LD, MEL 

Olearia ciliata (Benth.) Benth. 

MEL 

Olearia ciliata (Benth.) Benth. 

LD. MEL 

Olearia ciliata (Benth.) Benth 

Eurybia lehmaimiana Steetz - syn: MEL, LD, isosyn: CO, FI, FI-W, G, 

K. MEL, P, WRSL 

Olearia paucidentata (Steetz) Benth. 

Eurybia at'finis Steetz - syn: LD, MEL, isosyn: P 
Olearia elaeophila (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

Eurybia paucidentata var. subracemosa Steetz - svn: LD, MEL, isosyn: 
K. P 

Olearia paucidentata (Steetz) Benth. 

Eurybia paniculata Steetz - syn: LD. MEL 
Olearia elaeophila (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

Eurybia muricata Steetz - syn: LD, MEL, isosyn: G, MEL 
Olearia muricata (Steetz) Benth. 

Eurybia strigosa Steetz - syn: LD, MEL, isosyn: G 
Olearia strigosa (Steetz) Benth. 

Eurybia paucidentata var. hispida Steetz - type: K, MEL 
Olearia paucidentata (Steetz) Benth. 

Brachycome lanuginosa Steetz - isolecto: G. LD (see Davis 1948) 
Brachycome ciliaris var. lanuginosa (Steetz) Benth. 

Brachycome pusilla Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Davis 1948) 
Brachycome pusilla Steetz 

G, LD 

Brachycome ciliaris (Labill.) Less. 


LD, MEL 

Olearia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

Eurybia candidissima Steetz - syn: LD, MEL, isosyn: G, P 
Olearia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

LD, MEL. TCD 

Olearia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

G, LD, MEL, P 

Olearia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

Eurybia axillarisvar. exaltata Steetz - syn: LD, MEL, isosyn: CO, G, K, 
L. MEL. P. WRSL 

Olearia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

G, LD 

Brachycome iberidifolia Benth. 

Brachycome iberidifolia var. major Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Davis 
1948) 

Brachycome iberidifolia Benth. 

Brachycome iberidifolia var. divergens Steetz - isolecto: LD (see Davis 
1948) 

Brachycome iberidifolia Benth. 


N.S. Lander, Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss 


15 


PREISS 

FIELD 

NUMBER 

PL. PREISS. 
NUMBER 

(a) TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 

(b) CURRENT NAME 

- 

0097 

(a) Brachycome iberidifnlia var. alba Steetz - isolecto: LD (see Davis 1948) 

(b) Brachycome iberidifolia Benth. 

- 

0098 

(a) Brachycome pusilla Steetz - lectopara: LD (see Davis 1948) 

(b) Brachycome pusilla Steetz 


0099 

(a) Brachycome bellidioides Steetz - isolecto: G, LD (see Davis 1948) 

(b) Brachycome bellidioides Steetz 

- 

0100 

(a) Millotia glabra Steetz - syn: LD, isosyn: G (see Schodde 1963) 

(b) Milotia myosotidifolia (Benth.) Steetz 

- 

0101 

(a) Gymnogyne cotuloides Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Cotula cotuloides (Steetz) Druce 


0102 2 

(a) 

(b) Vittadinia 

- 

0103 

(a) Silphiosperma glandulosum Steetz - isolecto : LD (see Davis 1948) 

(b) Brachycome glandulosa (Steetz) Benth. 

- 

0104 2 

(a) TCD 

(b) Vittadinia 

- 

0105 

(a) Ixiolaena chry-santha Steetz - type: FI-W, LD 

(b) Podotheca chrysantha (Steetz) Benth. 

- 

0106 

(a) LD 

(b) Podotheca angustifolia (Labill.) Less. 

- 

0107 

(a) LD 

(b) Podotheca gnaphalioides Graham 


0108 ex parte 

(a) Picris squarrosa Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Picris squarrosa Steetz 

- 

0108 ex parte 4 

(a) 

(b) Senecia lautus G. Forster ex Willd. [as Senecio carnulentus var. 
angustissima Steetz] 

- 

0109 

(a) Senecia carnulentusvar. angustissima Steetz - syn LD, isosyn: G (see 

Ali 1969) 

(b) Senecio lautus G. Forster ex Willd. 

- 

0110 

(a) Senecio carnulentus var. latiloba Steetz - syn: LD, isosyn: G (see Ali 
1969) 

(b) Senecio lautus G. Forster ex Willd. 

- 

0111 

(a) LD 

(b) Senecio ramosissimus DC. 

- 

0112 

(a) LD 

(b) Senecio lautus G. Forster ex Willd. 

- 

0113 

(a) 

(b) 

- 

0114 2 

(a) 

(b) Senecio lautus G. Forster ex Willd. [as Senecio crithmifolius A. Rich. 


0115 2 

(a) 

(b) Senecio [as Erechtites] 

- 

0116 

(a) LD 

(b) Sonchus asper Hill 

- 

0117 

(a) LD 

(b) Sonchus oleraceus L. 

- 

0118 

(a) G, LD 


(b) Lagenifera huegelii Benth. 


16 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


PREISS PL. PREISS. 

FIELD NUMBER 

NUMBER 

(a) TYPE STATUS AND LOCATION 

(b) CURRENT NAME 

0119 

(a) LD 

(b) Hypochaeris glabra L. 

0120 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Ixiolaena viscosa Benth. 

0121 

(a) G, LD 

(b) Craspedia sp. [as Craspedia richea Cass.] 

0122 

(a) LD 

(b) Centipeda minuta (L.) A. Braun & Asch. 

0123 

(a) LD 

(b) Senecio ramosissima DC. 

0124 1,2 

(a) 

(b) 

0125 2 

(a) 

(b) Senecio [as Erechtites] 

0126 

(a) LD 

(b) Senecio quadridentatus Labill. 

0127 

(a) Styloncerus multiflorus Nees - type: LD 

(b) Rutidosis multiflorus (Nees) Robinson 

0128 4 

(a) 

(b) Cotula coronopifolia L. 

0129 4 

(a) 

(b) Arctotheca calendula (L.) Levyns [as Cryptostemma calendulaceum 
R. Br.] 

0130 

(a) Cymbonotus preissianus Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Cymbonotus preissianus Steetz 

1361 

(a) FI-W, LD 

(b) Siloxerus humifusus Labill. 

2414b 

(a) Chthonocephalus pseudevax Steetz - type: LD 

(b) Chthonocephalus pseudevax Steetz 

2416 

(a) Silphiosperma perpusillum Steetz - isolecto G, LD (see Davis 1948) 

(b) Brachycome perpusilla (Steetz) Benth. 

2427 

(a) Calotis erinacea Steetz - isolecto: LD (see Davis 1952) 

(b) Calotis erinacea Steetz 


1 Specimens not cited in “Plantae Preissianae”. 

2 Specimens not located at LD or G. 

3 The sole record of this species in Western Australia. Davis (1950) records a possible syntype of Lagenophora 
gracilis Steetz [= Lagenifera stipitata (Labill.) Druce] in Melbourne (MEL). 

4 Specimens noted by Agardh in his personal copy of Lehmann's “Plantae Preissianae” as present at LD, but 
not found there despite an exhaustive search. 

5 Burbidge (1948) has incorrectly nominated duplicates of this gathering as lectotype and lectoparatypes of 
Brachycome iberidifolia var. huegeliana Steetz. In his notes on this taxon Steetz cites the type of Brachycome 
iberidifolia Benth. collected by Huegel. Thus the name Brachycome iberidifolia var. huegeliana Steetz is not 
validly published. 


N.S. Lander, Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss 

Discussion 

An account of Preiss’s activities in Australia has been presented by McGillivray 
(1975). General background concerning the specimens at Lund and evidence that they 
are in fact from Lehmann’s personal herbarium has been given by Wilson (1983) and 
Crisp (1983). 

As can be seen from the above list the representation at Lund of Asteraceae collected 
by Preiss is high indeed. Of 142 collections recorded in “Plantae Preissianae” 115 are 
represented at Lund. 57 of which are types of taxa described therein, 55 by J. Steetz, the 
botanist responsible for the account of Asteraceae, one by Nees and one by Lehmann 
himself. Each of these specimens has full details of locality and date corresponding to 
those in “Plantae Preissianae”. Furthermore, each has been annotated by Steetz. Thus, 
as Crisp (1983) argues, where lectotypification has not yet been made the Lund speci- 
mens have equal status with those from Steetz’s own herbarium (now at MEL) and 
should be considered when names from “Plantae Preissianae” are lectotypified. 

A further two Preiss Asteraceae specimens were found at Lund which lack the num- 
bers and collecting details that would allow them to be related to those recorded in 
“Plantae Preissianae”. 

At the Geneva herbarium a large suite of Preiss Asteraceae specimens was located in 
the main collection. A smaller number bearing what appear to be original Preiss field 
numbers were found amongst undetermined material at the end of the family. Several 
more similarly numbered sheets of Asteraceae were found at other European herbaria 
visited. These collections, 23 in all, span the period 17 December 1838 to 8 November 
1840, and the numbers are in an irregular chronological order. In some cases these speci- 
mens bear details of locality and date which allow them to be correlated with those of 
“Plantae Preissianae”; others represent taxa not considered there. 

The Preiss specimens at Geneva appear to have come from four independent sources, 
namely: 

(a) specimens with Plantae Preissianae numbers labelled “in col. Swan River” in an 
unknown hand, received in 1843, with separate labels bearing Plantae 
Preissianae names; 

(b) specimens with Plantae Preissianae numbers and names, and printed labels 
reading “Mr L. Preiss, Swan River, 1837-40”; 

(c) specimens with Preiss’ original numbers, labelled with full details of locality and 
date in an unknown hand, without names, each with a second printed label 
reading “Swan-River Colony. - Nouvelle Holland 1839-1840, Preis.”, received in 
July 1842; 

(d) specimens donated by the Candolle family in 1921 with Preiss’ original num- 
bers, labelled “Nov. Holland., Swan River”, without date, without names, 
received in 1854, each with “Ferd. Muller 11 crossed out, some with number tags. 

Clearly, series (a) and (c) above were distributed not long after Preiss returned to Eur- 
ope in early 1842 where the general systematic arrangement of his collections was com- 
pleted and the organisation of “Plantae Preissianae” commenced under the guidance 
and supervision of Lehmann at Hamburg. It seems likely that the name labels for series 
(a) were provided at some later date, perhaps after publication of the relevant parts of 
“Plantae Preissianae”. 

Of the 80 Preiss Asteraceae specimens located at Geneva, 40 are types of taxa de- 
scribed in “Plantae Preissianae”. 

In the course of my examination of specimens of Olearia in European herbaria I en- 
countered Preiss collections in CGE, CO, FI, K, L and P. These are listed above. 


18 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


It is worth noting here that Preiss’ Asteraceae specimens held at Florence (FI) are 
labelled "Comm, dal Signore Preiss in Febrio 1846” and bear Plantae Preissianae num- 
bers and names. It seems that Preiss himself was distributing material as late as 1846. 
This and the preceding observations provide confirmation of Crisp’s (1983) surmise 
that material not distributed to the various authors of “Plantae Preissianae” was re- 
tained by Preiss and offered for sale. 

Burbidge (1972) has catalogued Preiss specimens held at Kew and Missouri (MO). In 
her list only a single Olearia collection is noted for Kew. Flowever, I myself encountered 
a total of five Preiss Olearia specimens at Kew. The additional four bear Preiss field 
numbers which, by virtue of the collection details, can easily be related to those of 
"Plantae Preissianae”. Presumably they are from amongst specimens purchased by 
William Hooker in London before Preiss continued on to Hamburg. Thus they might be 
expected to bear Preiss field numbers rather than those allocated later by Lehmann. 

Although this sample is rather small it suggests that the total of Preiss specimens rep- 
resented at Kew may be far greater than has hitherto been realised. 

All the Preiss Asteraceae specimens at Lund of type status were photographed. Black 
and white negatives and prints are lodged at the Western Australian Herbarium 
(PERTH). 


Acknowledgements 

This study was made possible by the travel component of funds provided by the Aus- 
tralian Bureau of Flora and Fauna (Department of Home Affairs and Environment) 
during my tour of duty as Australian Botanical Liaison Officer, 1984-5. 1 am especially 
grateful to Prof. Sven Snogerup and his staff at the Botaniska Museum, Lund, to the 
late Prof. Gilbert Boquet and to Dr Manfred Dittrich of the Conservatoire et -Jardins 
Botaniques, Geneva for their hospitality and assistance during my visits to their 
herbaria. I wish to thank Mr P. G. Wilson for confirming my identification of certain 
material borrowed from Geneva. 


References 

Ali, S. I. (1969). Senecio lautus complex in Australia. V. Taxonomic interpretation. Austral. J. Bot. 17: 
161-176. 

Belcher. R. O. (1956). A revision of the genus Erechtites (Compositae) with enquiries into Senecio and 
Arrenechtites. Ann. Missouri Bot. Card. 43: 1-85. 

Burbidge. N. T. ( 1958). A monographic study of Helichrysum subgenus Ozothamnus (Compositae) and of two 
related genera formerly included therein. Austral. J. Bot. 6: 229-294. 

Burbidge. N. T. (1972). "Notes on the Preiss collection of Western Australian plants”. Typescript. 

Cabrera, A. L. (1949). The genus Lagenophora (Compositae). Blumea 70: 629-632. 

Crisp, M. D. (1983). Plantae Preissianae Types at Lund. Austral. Syst. Bot. Soc. Newsletter 36: 4-6. 

Davis, Cl. L. (1948). Revision of the genus BraehveomeCass. I. Australian species. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South 
Wales 73: 142-241. 

Davis, G. L. (1950). a revision of the Australian species of the genus Lagenophora Cass. Proc. Linn. Soc. New 
South Wales 75: 122-132. 

Davis, G. L. (1952). Revision of the genus Calotis R.Br. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 77: 146-188. 

Davis, G. L. (1957). Revision of the genus Podolepis Labill. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 81: 245-286. 

Green, ,J. W. (1985). “Census of the vascular plants of Western Australia”, 2nd edition. Western Australian 
Herbarium, Department of Agriculture. Perth. 

Kroner. G. (1980). Systematische studien im unkdreis von Athrixia Ker-Gawler (Asteraceae). Mitt. Bot. 
Miinchen 16: 1-268. 


N.S. Lander, Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss 19 

Lehmann, J, G. C. (1844-1848). “Plantae Preissianae”. 2 Vols. Meissner: Hamburg. 

Lewis, P. and Summerhayes, V. S. (1950). Pithocarpa Lindl. Kew Bull. 1950: 435-440. 

McGillivray, D. J. (1975). Johann August Ludwig Preiss (1811-1883) in Western Australia. Telopea 1: 1-18. 

Nordenstam, B. (1980). The herbaria of Lehmann and Sonder in Stockholm, with special reference to the 
Ecklon and Zeher collection. Taxon 29: 279-291. 

Schodde, R. (1963). A taxonomic revision of the genus Millotia Cass. (Asteraceae). Trans. Roy. Soc. South 
Australia 92: 27-31. 

Short, P. S. (1981a). A revision of Angianthua Wendl., sensu lato (Compositae: Inuleae: Gnaphahinae), 1. 
Muelleria 5: 143-183. 

Short, P. S. (1981b). A revision of Angianthus Wendl., sensu lato (Compositae: Inuleae: Gnaphalnnae), 2. 
Muelleria 5: 185-214. 

Short, P. S. (1986). A revision of Pogonolepis Steetz (Compositae: Inuleae: Gnaphahinae). Muelleria 5: 
237-253. 

Wilson, K. L. (1983). Plantae Preissianae specimens. Austral. Syst. Bot. Soc. Newsletter 34: 5-6. 







Kingia 1(1) : 21-26(1987). 


21 


The distribution of introduced Rumex (Polygonaceae) 
in Western Australia 


John Moore 1 and John K. Scott 2 

1 Western Australian Department of Agriculture, Albany Office, Albany 6330, Western Australia 

2 Entomology Branch, Western Australian Department of Agriculture, Baron-Hay Court, South Perth 
6151, Western Australia. Present address: CSIRO Biological Control Unite/- Department of Zoology, Uni- 
versity of Cape Town, Rondebosch, Cape Town 7700, South Africa. 


Abstract 

Moore, John and Scott, John K. The distribution of introduced Rumex (Polygonaceae) in Western Aus- 
tralia. Kingia 1(1) : 21-26(1987). The paper records nine alien species of Rumex (R. acetosella L., R. 
bucephalophorus L., R. conglomeratus Murray, R. crispus L., R. frutescens Thouars, R. obtusifolius L., R. 
pulcher L., R. sagittatus Thunb., R. uesicarius L.) for Western Australia, of which three (R. bucephalophorus, 
R. frutescens and R. sagittatus) are considered to be no longer present. A distribution map based on a 1° lat. 
x 1.5° long, grid is given for each species. 


Introduction 

The genus Rumex (Polygonaceae) in Australia consists of eight indigenous and nine 
introduced species (Rechinger 1984). The distribution within Australia is given for the 
indigenous species by Rechinger (1984) and amongst the introduced species; 
R. acetosella L. has been mapped across all states (Archer and Martin 1979), in Victoria 
(Churchill and Corona 1972, Willis 1972) and in Queensland (Kleinschmidt and John- 
son 1977); R. crispus L., R. conglomeratus Murray, R. pulcher L., R. obtusifolius L. and 
R. sagittatus Thunb. have been mapped in Victoria by Churchill and Corona (1972), and 
Willis (1972). Rumex vesicarius L. has been noted as occurring in central Australia and 
not the northern half of the Northern Territory (Chippendale 1972). In this paper we 
give the distribution of the introduced species in Western Australia. 


Methods 

The methods used to map Rumex followed that of Hnatiuk and Maslin (1980 a&b). 
The nine species mapped were arranged alphabetically and the occurrence in a grid cell 
were indicated. 

The maps are based partly on specimens in the Western Australian Herbarium 
(PERTH). As well ground surveys were made covering all the grid cells included in the 
area bounded by Carnarvon, Kalgoorlie and Esperance. The ground survey method was 
to examine plants seen alongside roadsides and in adjoining farmland. This was done 
opportunistically between 1981 and 1984. A questionnaire distributed to farmers 
throughout the south west region also gave an indication of where to search. Field 
identification of species was based on fruiting plants and Rechinger’s recent survey 
(1984). As well surveys were carried out with Rechinger to confirm field 
identifications. 


22 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 





Rumex bucephalophorus 



Figure 1. Distribution of Rumex species introduced in Western Australia. 


John Moore and John K. Scott, Introduced Rumex 


23 





Figure 1 (continued). Distribution of Rumex species introduced in Western Australia. 


24 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Results and Discussion 

Figure 1 shows the distribution of Rumex species introduced in Western Australia. All 
the introduced species, except R. vesicarius, are restricted to the south west of Western 
Australia (Figure 1). In this area R. crispus was the most widespread species, being 
found in 22 grid cells. This number is however inflated by single occurrences in the dryer 
areas such as for Kalgoorlie where the plants are found near water sources in townships. 
Rumex pulcher and R. acetosella were both found in 16 grid cells. The distribution given 
here for R. acetosella corresponds with that published in Archer and Martin (1979). The 
next most abundant species in the south west was R. conglomeratus which occurred in 
nine grid cells, most of which were restricted to the extreme south west corner. Only one 
other species, R. obtusifolius, is known to be definitely present in the south west. It is 
restricted to two grid cells on the south coast. 

The remaining three recorded introduced species in the south west are possibly no 
longer extant. All are only known from herbarium specimens. In 1981 both authors 
examined the collection area of R. bucephalophorus but no plants were found. This 
plant was collected once in 1963. Rumex sagittatus has only been collected from the 
urban areas of Perth and Bunbury (Rechinger 1984) and is not known from agricultural 
areas. Lastly the only known specimen of R. frutescens was collected by one of us 
(Moore) in 1981. Since then visits to the collection site by the authors in 1982 and 1984, 
and Rechinger (1984) have failed to find further plants. 

Rumex vesicarius will probably prove to be the most widespread species with further 
collecting in the centre of Western Australia. At present it is known from 23 grid cells 
however at least two, 255 and 274, in the wetter south west area are probably incidental 
records. 

Only one region, the far north of West ern Australia, has neither introduced nor native 
species of Rumex (Rechinger 1984). 

In conclusion nine species of Rumex have been recorded as introduced into Western 
Australia and six are definitely established. Eight species are found in the south west 
while the remaining species occurs mainly in the central dryer areas. 


Acknowledgements 

We thank the Western Australian Herbarium for access to their collections. We also 
thank the Entomology Branch and the Albany Office of the Western Australian Depart- 
ment of Agriculture for various assistance. The project was funded in part from a grant 
from the Australian Meat Research Committee. 


References 

Archer, A. C. and Martin, P. M. (1979). The range and status of Rumex acetosella in Australia. “Proceedings 
of the 7th Asian-Pacific Weed Science Society Conference”, Sydney, pp. 347-350. 

Chippendale, G. M. (1972). Checklist of Northern Territory plants. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of 
New South Wales 96: 207-267. 

Churchill, D. M. and Corona. A. de ( 1972). “The distribution of Victorian plants”. The Dominion Press, North 
Blackburn. 

Hnatiuk. R. J. and Maslin, B. R. (1980a). The distribution of Acacia (Leguminosae-Mimosoideae) in Western 
Australia, Part 1. Individual species distribution. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes No. 4: 
1-103. 


Hnatiuk, R. J. and Maslin. B. R. (1980b). The distribution of Acacia (Leguminosae-Mimosoideae) in Western 
Australia, Part 2. Lists of species occurring in 1° x 1.5° grid cells. Western Australian Herbarium Re- 
search Notes No. 4: 105-144. 


John Moore and John K. Scott, Introduced Rumex 


25 


Kleinschmidt, H. E. and Johnson, R. W. (1977). “Weeds of Queensland”. Government Printer, Brisbane. 469 

pp. 

Rechinger, K. W. (1984). Rumex (Polygonaceae) in Australia: a reconsideration. Nuytsia 5: 75-122. 

Willis, J. H. (1972). “A handbook to plants in Victoria”, vol. 2, “Dicotyledons”. Melbourne University Press, 
Carlton, Victoria. 832 pp. 


54609-3 





Kingia 1(1): 27-48 (1987) 


27 


Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park, Western Australia: 
floristics and nutrient status 


W. Foulds 

Western Australian College of Advanced Education, Claremont Campus, Goldsworthy Road, Claremont, 

Western Australia 6010 


Abstract 

Foulds W. Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park. Western Australia: tloristics and nutrient status. 
Kingia 1(1): 27-48 ( 1987). The floristics and nutrient status of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park, Perth, are de- 
scribed, The vegetation was represented by a low, open Banksi& woodland with emergent Kucalyptus 
marginata, on neutral yellow sands belonging to the Spearwood Dune System. One hundred and eighty three 
plant species were recorded, of which 41 were introduced. The tree canopy comprised five species with Battksm 
attenuata dominant. Xanthorrhoea preissii was the most abundant understorey species. Macro- and micro- 
nutrient analyses were conducted on soil, plant and litter samples. The soil was found to be deficient in carbon, 
phosphorus and nitrate nitrogen, but relatively high in potassium. Species belonging to the Leguminosae fam- 
ily contained nearly twice the nitrate nitrogen content in above-ground tissue compared to species in other 
families. 


Introduction 

Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park, occupying an area of 1 1 hectares in the Perth suburb 
of Padbury, Western Australia (31° 45’S; 115° 52’E), is a reserve set aside as a cemetery 
and recreation area. The Park is situated approximately 2 km from the Indian Ocean on 
the Spearwood Dune System (Bettenay et al. 1960). The vegetation consists of low open 
Banksia woodland. 

The Spearwood dunes have had a complex history, being subjected to both deposition 
and later erosion (Seddon 1972). In its natural state the Spearwood System supports a 
high open forest of Eucalyptus gomphocephala, E. marginata and E. calophylla. In the 
western portion the dunes are generally younger and the shallower soils are referred to 
as the Cottesloe Soil Association (Seddon 1972). These soils support a similar species 
composition as the deeper Karrakatta soils to the east. E. gomphocephala, however, is 
much more common than E. marginata and E. calophylla, and limestone usually occurs 
within 2 metres of the surface in the Cottesloe soils. A nearby Banksia woodland at Star 
Swamp, which lies within the Cottesloe Association, is dominated by Banksia attenuata, 
B. menziesii and B. prionotes, with minor contributions of E. gomphocephala, and 
Allocasuarina fraseriana (Bell et al. 1979). The top soil is generally dark grey-brown be- 
coming yellowish-brown deeper, with a neutral pH value. In general, the soils of the 
Spearwood System are moderately to weakly leached with low calcium levels, high iron 
content and weakly acidic pH values (Havel 1976). The Star Swamp understorey in- 
cludes Xanthorrhoea preissii, Jacksonia sternbergiana and Dryanda nivea, while the 
more common introduced species are Ehrharta longiflora, Avena barbata, Hypochaeris 
glahra and Romulea rosea (Bell et al. 1979). The percentage of plant cover from intro- 
duced species is 36%. 

The study area has a dry Mediterranean climate with average annual rainfalls of ca 
740 mm per year. About 80% of the yearly total falls in winter between the months of 
May and August. The winters are mild with mean temperatures of: maximum 18.7°C 
and minimum 9.9°C, while summers are warm to hot with mean temperatues of: maxi- 
mum 29.9°C and minimum 18.6°C. 


28 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Methods 

Three areas of native woodland within Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park were selected 
for this study: 4, 6 and 11 (Figure 1). They were similar with respect to topography and 
vegetation. Area 1 1 was burned in 1979, but the fire histories of the other areas were un- 
known. The study was conducted mainly in September of 1981 and 1982, although visits 
were made each month to record flowering data. 



Vegetation 

A number of plots, each 10 m 2 in area, were established at each of the three areas and 
a list of vascular plants was constructed. The nomenclature followed Green (1985). A 
voucher specimen for each plant species was deposited in the Western Australian Her- 
barium (PERTH). All perennial species were given a cover/abundance value on the 
Braun-Blanquet scale (Mueller-Dombois & Ellenberg 1974). To determine the fre- 
quency and percentage cover of herbaceous species aim 2 quadrat was divided into 100 
equal subsections. Each occurrence of a plant in a subsection was recorded. This was re- 
peated ten times for each area. 

Measurements of the tree canopy were made by recording tree height, diameter at 
breast height (dbh) and number of stems (i4 cm) within 30 m x 30 m quadrats. Two 
such quadrats were sampled in each of the three areas. The biomass of the shrub and 
herb layers was determined by collecting above ground living plant material in four ran- 
dom 1 m 2 quadrats at each site. The litter retained by a 1 mm sieve was also gathered 
from the same 1 m 2 quadrats. The litter and plant material were oven dried at 95°C to 
constant weight. 


29 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 

The frequency (%) and the relative cover abundance (%) for herbaceous species and 
the relative dry weight contribution (%) for the perennial shrub species were calculated 
as follows: 

F(%) = number of quadrats including a species x 100/total number of quadrats 

RCA(%) = total % cover for a species x 100/total % cover for all species 
RDW(%) = dry weight of a single species x 100/total dry weight for all species. 


Nutrients 

Five soil samples from the surface 10 cm were collected at each site and analysed by 
C.S.B.P. and Farmers. Spectrophotometric determinations were undertaken on sodium 
bicarbonate extractable phosphorus and potassium. The water soluble nitrate-nitrogen 
(NO, r N) was calculated with a nitrate specific ion electrode at 30°C. D.T.P.A. extract- 
able copper, zinc and manganese concentrations were determined by atomic absorption. 

Samples of above ground living plant material were harvested for nutrient analyses in 
October. At least ten herbaceous plants and ca 10 cm of new growth (both stem and leaf) 
from a minimum of ten shrubs, were collected per sample. 

Analyses of the shoot and litter material after acid digestion gave the total P, K and 
N as mg g 1 and the Cu, Zn and Mn as p, g g '• 

The carbon content was determined by oven drying at 100° C overnight and then heat- 
ing to 500° C for eight hours. 


Results 


Vegetation 

The vegetation was a low open Banksia woodland with emergent Eucalyptus 
marginata trees. The flora was relatively rich and varied, with 183 species recorded 
within 50 families (Appendix 1). There were 69 woody perennial and 114 herbaceous 
species. The flora excluded the numerous planted trees and shrubs in the gardens and 
10 species associated with a nearby lake (Appendix 2). The herbs included 39 introduced 
annual species, but only 2 introduced perennials, Solarium sodomeum and Pelargonium 
capitatum. 


Table 1. Tree canopy parameters. 


Species 

No. stems ha 1 

Basal area 
(m 2 ha' 1 ) 

Average 

height 

(m) 

Eucalyptus gomphocephala 

5.5 

9.6 

14.2 (30)* 

E. marginata 

93.6 

24.1 

9.3 (18) 

Banksia attenuata 

338.7 

22.9 

3.0 ( 8) 

B. menziesii 

51.4 

4.8 

4.5 ( 9) 

Allocasuarina fraseriana 

14.8 

2.4 

4.0 ( 9) 

Total 

504.0 

63.8 



* Height of tallest tree in woodland shown in parenthesis. 


The tree canopy was made up of five species of which Banksia attenuata was domi- 
nant (Table 1 and Appendix 1) with a density of 338.7 stems ha 1 , a basal area of 22.9 m 2 
ha 1 , an average height of 3 m, and a frequency of 82%. E. marginata was the next most 
common species, while all other species had little influence on the density of the upper 
stratum. Banksia menziesii was interesting in that all three flower colour variants (red, 
yellow and rusty brown) were present in the park. 


30 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Xanthorrhoea preissii was the most abundant understorey species with a frequency 
of 100% and a biomass contribution of over 25% for the whole of the lower stratum (Ap- 
pendix 1). Other common shrubs included four Daviesia species, mostly with 
frequencies greater than 50%, while Daviesia nudiflora contributed 6% of the total 
biomass. Members of this genus flowered in winter and a yellow-flowered variant of 
D. nudiflora was observed. Three Hibbertia species were recorded, with the ubiquitous 
Hibbertia hypericoides contributing 3% of the total dry weight. Another common south- 
western Australian species, Bossiaea eriocarpa, was also frequently found. 

The predominant herbaceous species in the southern site was Mesomelaena stygia 
which contributed 27% of the total biomass, 14% cover and had a frequency of 80% oc- 
currence. Loxocarya flexuosa and Restio aff. sphacelatus were dominant in the northern 
site, each contributing over 10% of the cover and biomass. The most common intro- 
duced species were the two geophytes, Romulea rosea and Homeria flaccida, which were 
4.7% and 1% of the total biomass and had frequencies of 50% and 27%, respectively. 
They were followed by three annuals, in order of decreasing cover abundance, 
Hvpochaeris glabra, Briza maxima, and Trifolium campestre. Introduced species pro- 
vided 52% of ground floor cover (Table 2). Although there was a similar number of intro- 
duced species at both sites, the northern sites had 30% more cover. The northern sites 
had double the dry weight of litter compared to the southern sites (Table 3). This was 
probably due to the greater density of Banksia attenuata trees and their consequent leaf 
fall, rather than to any small differences in understorey densities. 


Table 2. Total number and cover abundance (m 2 ) of native and introduced herbaceous species in the 

northern (roadside) and southern sites. 


Species 

types 

Northern site 

No. spp. Cover 

Southern site 

No. spp. Cover 

Total Park 

No. spp Cover 

Native 

20 51.5 

23 

33.6 

31 85.1 

Introduced 

13 45.0 

12 

24.7 

18 69.7 

Only those species recorded in quadrat data are 

included. 



Table 3. Average dry 

weight (g m 2 ) of living vegetation and litter of the Northern and Southern 
sites. 

Species Types 


Sites 

Northern 

Southern 

Park Average 

Woody perennials 
Native herbs 
Introduced herbs 
Litter 


120.6 (4) 

96.8 (4) 

21.8 (4) 

127.3 (7) 

159.6 ( 8) 

117.6 ( 8) 
0.0 ( 8) 

63.0 (10) 

146.6 

110.6 

7.3 

89.5 


Number of samples shown in parenthesis 


The main flowering period for most species was early spring (Figure 2). The response to 
the winter rains was reflected in the spring flowering winter annuals. Although the dry 
summer usually inhibits growth and reproduction, Banksia attenuata, Leucopogon 
propinquus, Melaleuca acerosa and Calytrix fraseri of the shrub component and Restio 
aff. sphacelatus, Ptilotus caespitulosus, Thysanotus patersonii and Tricoryne elatior of 
the herb layer flowered mostly at this time of year. The natives Jacksonia sternbergiana 
and Scaevola paludosa and the well adapted exotics Pelargonium capitatum and 
Solanum nigrum flowered all year round, while Corynotheca micrantha possessed 
flowers for only a few days. Drosera erythrorhiza and Conostylis teretifolia were never 
observed to bloom between 1979 and 1983. 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


31 



Month 


Figure 2. Number of species flowering during each month of the year. The data summarize observations from 
1981 and 1982 (shrubs, hatched; herbs, open). 


Mineral Nutrient Status 

The soils were neutral yellow sands varying in depth from zero to 11 metres over pin- 
nacles of limestone. The carbon content was low compared to darker soils such as sand 
heaths (Table 4). 

As in the case with most Australian soils there was a paucity of nutrients (Table 4), 
particularly phosphorus and nitrate nitrogen, but compared to Quindalup and 
Bassendean soils the potassium level was relatively high (24.8pg g 1 ). The low chloride 
content of 20/zg g 1 , compared with 261.5^.g g 1 for foredunes, could be attributed to the 
distance of the study area from the sea and a decrease in deposition of aerosol salt. 

Table 5 shows that the average phosphorus content of the litter, 0.2 mg g 1 , and plant 
tissues, 0.08 mgg' 1 , were like the soil, very low compared with other macronutrients 
tested such as K, 9.8 mgg' 1 and NO.,-N, 10.3 mgg 1 . Members of the family 
Papilionaceae possessed twice the NO -N content compared with other species analysed 
(Table 5). The species dominating the ecosystem, Banksia attenuata, was relatively low 
in N, P and K. Along with Banksia menziesii and Dryandra nivea it contained massive 
quantities of manganese. This rich source of Mn probably accounts for the high levels 
recorded in the litter. 


32 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


3 

cd 

o 

c 


Cd 

CQ 

T3 

C 

cd 

'P 

o 

o 

£ 

u 

cd 

V 

a 

CO 

a 

j3 

13 

.£ 

*3 

O' 


3 

— 

CO 


3 


01 

3 

cd 

H 


O 


c 

CS3 


3 

O 




Oh 


Oh 


U 


6S 


K 

o. 


§| 

<H *-l 


<! 'C 

is -2 


— ; _Q 


o o 

05 05 

d d 


00 o 

CO TH 
CN CO 


O p 
o r-H 


p p 


p p 

d i> 


p p 
05 00 


LO T-t 
O Tj< 

uo io 


a a 

o o 

<M O 
to 


PP 
X cd 

3 K 

o 

c c 

o o 

O O 

oo 


2 "3 

^ 5 c 

Q n^S 

£ o 3 

• S *— >-• 

^ ox: 
O* !i* c/2 


oo 


Q 3 
O © 
O ^ 

is =! 

cc 2 

< J3 
w C 

Oh M 

CO CO 


00 

ui 


a 


a 

rX 


TP 

c 


p 

O 


T3 

3 

V cd 

<"1 

H o 

•zri 

H .2 
m2 
m r 
< « 
COCO 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


33 


Table 5. Nutrient Status of the more common plant species and the litter layer. 




mg g' 1 



gg g' 1 


P 

K 

NO, 

-N 

Cu 

Zn 

Mn 

Litter 

0.2 

2.0 


1.4 

8.1 

39.5 

POACEAE 







*Briza maxima 

1.2 

13.5 

7.1 

2.6 

9.9 

49 

*Lagurus ovatus 

1.0 

14.6 

5.2 

1.8 

19.5 

23 

Stipa compressa 

1.1 

12.1 

5.8 

2.2 

10.9 

21 

CYPERACEAE 







Lepidosperma gracile 

0.4 

9.6 

5.5 

3.3 

11.8 

41 

Mesomelaena stygia 

0.5 

6.3 

5.4 

2.4 

8.3 

25 

RESTIONACEAE 







Loxocarva flexuosa 

0.6 

10.7 

6.3 

2.4 

14.2 

63 

Restio aff. sphacelatus 

0.4 

7.8 

8.0 

1.0 

8.0 

71 

XANTHORRHOEACEAE 







Xanthorrhoea preissii 

0.5 

9.5 

4.5 

1.8 

5.1 

10 

CASUARINACEAE 







Allocasuarina fraseriana 

0.5 

6.8 

5.6 

2.2 

28.6 

20 

PROTEACEAE 







Banksia attenua ta 

0.5 

4.5 

7.6 

10.4 

11.4 

241 

Banksia menziesii 

0.6 

3.2 

5.5 

4.0 

10.2 

220 

Dryanda nivea 

0.6 

5.0 

4.4 

2.7 

7.4 

135 

Petrophile linearis 

0.6 

5.8 

4.7 

1.3 

10.0 

21 

PAPILIONACEAE 







Daviesia decurrens 

0.8 

8.5 

12.7 

5.3 

12.5 

33 

Daviesia divaricata 

0.8 

4.8 

8.4 

7.9 

6.3 

7 

Daviesia gracilis 

0.5 

6.0 

10.5 

3.1 

5.6 

28 

Daviesia nudi flora 

0.8 

8.8 

14.5 

6.2 

7.3 

15 

Hardenbergia eomptoniana 

1.2 

17.4 

15.2 

2.4 

10.3 

20 

Jacksonia sternbergiana 

1.0 

9.2 

13.1 

2.4 

12.8 

11 

Kennedia prostrata 

1.1 

13.4 

17.9 

4.2 

21.2 

69 

Oxvlobium capitatum 

0.6 

8.2 

13.9 

2.9 

13.1 

29 

*Trit'olium campestre 

1.7 

14.8 

26.8 

5.2 

27.8 

39 

DILLENIACEAE 



. 




Hibbertia hvpericoides 

0.6 

7.1 

9.9 

3.1 

10.8 

38 

Hibbertia racemosa 

0.6 

7.9 

7.9 

11.2 

23.4 

38 

MYRTACEAE 







Eucalyptus gomphocephala 

0.9 

6.2 

7.1 

2.4 

11.8 

33 

Eucalyptus marginata 

1.1 

5.9 

7.5 

10.5 

15.2 

31 

GOODENIACEAE 







Scaevola canescens 

0.7 

13.4 

8.9 

1.6 

11.1 

15 

Scaevola paludosa 

0.7 

16.9 

7.0 

2.5 

13.0 

18 

ASTERACEAE 







* Hvpochaeris glabra 

1.6 

23.5 

7.8 

2.5 

32.7 

19 

Waitzia suaveolens 

1.0 

13.6 

9.2 

7.4 

29.7 

30 

MEAN 

0.8 

9.8 

10.3 

4.0 

14.0 

47.1 


Naturalized alien species. 


34 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Discussion 

The Banksia community at Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park was similar to the nearby 
woodland at Star Swamp (Bell et al. 1979) which was dominated by Banksia species and 
with minor contributions by Eucalyptus gomphocephala and Allocasuarina fraseriana. 
However, the frequency of Eucalyptus marginata in Pinnaroo Park was much greater 
and the understorey layer also showed local variations. Xanthorrhoea preissii was pre- 
dominant and although the ubiquitous Hibbertia hypericoides was commonly seen, the 
shrub canopy was dominated by the four Daviesia species. 

Pinnaroo Park was floristically similar to other Banksia communities found in 
Spearwood sand north of Perth, e.g. Type D of Havel (1976), but lacked certain shrub 
species such as Svnaphea polymorpha. The Banksia woodland described by Milewski 
and Daridge (1981) at Jandakot Airport occupies deep, highly leached white over yellow' 
sand between the Bassendean and Spearw-ood Dune Systems, and differs mainly in the 
composition of the shrub stratum. At that site Beaufortia elegans and Leucopogon 
kingianus are common, but both are absent at Pinnaroo. In areas where yellow sand 
reached the surface mutually common components were Mesomelaena stygia, Hibbertia 
racemosa and Daviesia nudiflora. 

The Pinnaroo woodland had a typical Western Australian ground floor vegetation, 
with few grasses and the ground cover predominantly Mesomelaena stygia and two 
species of Restionaceae. 

Degradation of vegetation, similar to that seen at Star Swamp, is evident from the 
high frequency of introduced ‘weedy’ species and the presence of pyrogenic grasses, typi- 
cal of often-burnt vegetation. This was particularly true in the case of the northern sec- 
tion of the Park where secondary succession was occurring faster than in the southern 
areas. Here a new floristie composition is evolving, caused by the introduction of alien 
species. In this altered community there was no regeneration of Eucalyptus 
gomphocephala , although young Banksia and E. marginata saplings were common. 

The woodland community, which developed in mildy leached soils, contained a large 
number of species. Areas where severe conditions prevail are reported to support fewer 
species (Bell 1980). The presence of Xanthorrhoea preissii suggested a relatively moist 
habitat w'hereas the presence of Hibbertia hypericoides, Mesomelaena stygia and 
Petrophile macrostachya indicated a substratum of a weakly leached sandy soil, typical 
of the Spearwood Series (Havel 1976). This was confirmed by the level of soil nutrients 
which although well below that of coastal sand dune areas had more than double the 
amount of macronutrients (PKN) of the leached Bassendean sands ( Table 4). 

The plant tissues that had been shown to act as a means of storage of nutrients in 
woodland communities, (Ovington 1962) were relatively low in P but did possess larger 
quantities of other minerals. Legume species were a common component of the 
understorey and with their high nitrogen content, the soil N should be maintained. 

Excessive leaching of the nutrients through the permeable sandy, humus-depleted soil 
by the winter rains may be prevented by the Banksia trees acting as reservoirs. Slow 
growing species, gradual leaf fall and low' litter component caused a slow recycling of nu- 
trients, although fire probably speeds up the turnover to some degree. 

Nutrient input by clearfall rain w r as low compared to that in a nearby coastal 
heathland area located at Ocean Reef (Foulds unpublished data). Although the July K 
recording was the same. 1.2 kg ha ’, no phosphorus, nitrate nitrogen or trace elements 
were found. 

Estimates of canopy nutrient leaching from tree leaves and stems by throughfall rain 
in Eucalypt forests (Smith 1974) suggests that some mineral replacement in the Banksia 
woodland would occurr in this manner. This is probably true for manganese which was 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


35 


present in extremely large quantities in the shoots of Banksia menziesii and 
B. attenuata. The accumulation of ions, such as Mn, by indigenous plants from nutrient 
deficient soil suggests a specialised adaptation. In the case of the Banksias and Dryanda 
nivea , which contained a high amount of Mn, their success may have been due to the 
presence of proteiod roots (Lamont 1974). 


Acknowledgements 

I am extremely grateful to the C.S.B.P. and Farmers for soil, plant and water analyses 
and the Bureau of Meteorology, Perth for climatic data. 

Thanks are also due to the staff of Western Australian Herbarium, and Mr 
P. McMillan, for taxonomic assistance and for checking plant names. I am indebted to 
Mr K. Vickery and students of the Western Australian College of Advanced Education 
for field and laboratory assistance, and to the Warden of Pinnaroo, Mr English for sup- 
plying a map of the area as well as other useful local information. 

I also wish to thank an anonymous referee for improvements to the text and Mrs I. 
McMath for typing the manuscript. 


References 

Bell, D. T. (1980). Gradient trends in the streamside forest of central Illinois. Bulletin Torrey Botanical Club 
107: 172-180. 

Bell. D. T., Loneragan, W.A. and Dodd. J. (1979). Preliminary vegetation survey of Star Swamp and vicinity; 
Western Australia. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes No. 2: 1-21. 

Bettenay. E.. McArthur, W. M. and Hingston. F. L. (1960). "The soil associations of the Swan Coastal Plain, 
Western Australia". CSIRO Division of Soils, Soils and Land Use Series No. 35. 

Green, J. W. (1985). “Census of the vascular plants of Western Australia", 2nd edition. Western Australia Her- 
barium. Department of Agriculture. Perth. 

Havel, J.J. (1976). The potential of the northern Swan Coastal Plain for Pinus pinaster Ait. plantations, West- 
ern Australia. Western Australian Forests Department Bulletin 76. 

Hopkins. E. R. (1980). The fertilizer factor in Pinus pinaster Ait. plantations on sandy soil of the Swan Coastal 
Plain, Western Australia. Western Australian Forests Department Bulletin 68. 

Lamont. B. (1974). “Proteoid Roots". Thesis, (Botany), University of Western Australia. 

Milewski, A. V. and Daridge, C. (1981 ). The physical environment, floristics and phenology of a Banksia wood- 
land near Perth. Western Australia. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes No. 5: 29-48. 

Mueller-Dombois, D. and Ellenberg, E. ( 1974). “Aims and Methods in Vegetation Ecology”. Wiley, New York. 

Ovington, -J. D. (1962). Quantit.iative ecology and the woodland ecosystem concept. Advanced Ecological Re- 
search 1: 103-192. 

Seddon, G. (1972). “Sense of Place”. University of Western Australia Press, Nedlands, Western Australia. 

Smith, M. K. (1974). Throughfall, stemflow and interception in Pine and Eucalvpt forests. Australian For- 
estry 36: 190-197. 


Appendix 1. Name, family, type, origin, frequency, cover and biomass of species in the woodland area of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 

W - Woody perennial; H - herb; n - native; i = introduced; F = frequency; RCA = Relative cover abundance (herbs); RDW = dry weight contribution; 

EC A - estimated cover abundance (shrubs) [o = occasional plant; r = rare (0.1%); f = few (0.1-1%); c = common (1-5%); ab = abundant (5-25%)] nf = no flowers. 


36 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


be 

.5 "o 

*-> o 
a> -r- 

& s 

j- 


c 

o 

w 


6 S 

£ 

Q 

Pi 


ss 

c 

o 

0 £ 


8 ? 


a. 

>, 


O 

CO 

<u a > 
'o 42 
a) co 

W ^ 
3 
03 


be 

3 

< 


-3 33 

0 'S 

°5j 

CO ^ 
CJ?3 

^02 


be 

3 

< 


£ £ £ £ £ 


3 

< 


be 

3 

< 

a 

< 


00 

© 


be 

o 

a 

>> 

CO 

c 0 

Q 


3 


3 

£ 


3 

< 


3 

3 

3 

o 


CQ 


cq 

02 


ai co 
.c ^ 
ST" CO 

-Si o 
co 

05 « 


CQ 


co.^ 

|s 

cn ^ 

CO ^ 

~ a> 

• 5 be 

co 3 
CO co 


3 

p. ► 


3 m — 


£0 


CCS 73 


_ca (u j£- 


-3 

q 




f- ^ f-i 

^:o ^:cu 


? be 

-Q To 
ecs <u 
cj X, 

l§ 
s s 

&uo o 


be 

3 

< 


3 

% 


o 


-Q 

Cj CO 
CO CO 
CO 

|o 

exs 

Q 3 
Cj 33 

- 2 m 


^elo 


be 

3 

< 


cO 

O 


3 

<D 

£ 

J 

3 

T3 

3 

CD 

£ 

-d 

3 

o> 

£ 

£ 

cO 

o> 

CQ 

m 

’S 

CQ 

m 

& 

CD 

5 

=8 


O 

Q 

J 

*4 

33 

CD 

33 

£ 

1 

o 

+-> 

-4-> 

IS 

X -3 

O) m 

-3 £ 

3 O 

X 

h-3 

IS 

co 

9 

co 

3 

O 


co 

£ 

co 

3 

*c s 

1 1 

co -3 

o o 


C0 

• S 

’C 

co 


9 

3 
-3 
co 

•5 3 3 
3 3 co 
C0 © cO 

=5 SO 

co 3 
co -3 
O O £ 

g 


Anagallis arvensis var. caerulea (L.) Primulaceae H (i) - Sept-Oct 

Gouan 

Blue Pimpernel 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


> 

o 

2 


co 


a 

P 

T> 


> 

O 

2 


O O 


Oh 

> 

o 

2 


be 

P 

< 


a 

< 


p 

l— T> 


> 

O 

2 


b£ 

P 

< 

3 

’“s 


> 

o 

2 


CO co 


g 

X 


c p, 

x 1 


3 


is 


3 

X 


q 

E 


o 

co 


o 

Oh 


CL. 


Oh 


Oh 


CO 

a 

.2 

'a 

cO 

Oh 


CO 


03 


o 

o 


X! 

G 


3 

~q 


o 

-q 


N Oh 

O 

be .5° 

q 3 
^cu 


q CO 
a> 

o £ 
-q jo 

q *q 


G 

>> 

> 


3 

"3 

q 


o 

co 

C_> T3 
Qj q 

-q q 

-2 © 
cj Cu 
q co 


T3 

c 


3 

q. 


-Q CO 
CO w 

q-u 


^03 


co 

05 

co .2 

C/5 

q g 

q q 

© p<H 

-Hi PL) 
CO fl 

.co 3 

3 CL 
“q3 

rS CO 

03 CO 


"3 

q co 

CO ••— 

be-S 
.2 q 


q q 
03 03 


03 

05 

3 .2 

,CL> c/5 
N 

g § 
s m 


►V N 

q c 


T3 

G 


CD 

o .2 

q c n 

• S’* 
q. ro 
.co 

ffi be 

^ G 

q 2 


p 

o 

O 


CQ^ 030 


CO 

g« 

CH ^ 

1 g 

co .c/5 

2 >> 
q g 
3 G 
2 2 
030 


Oh 

Oh 


T3 

c 


O 


o 

05 


03 

05 


s 

q a 

c/5 

q 

q c/5 
.8 2 

O 

_q 

12 

"3 
q q 

« 

3 

53 

s- 
ca g 

•SH 

C/5 

q 

© 

o 

q 

CJ 

’c/5 

So 

q 

q be 

.5 
q 12 

0 

1 
q 

q 

P 

O’ 

Sh 

q 

• 2 2 
13 O 

§03 

q 

•S to 

5 § 

■5 s 

c/5 -a 

gp 

C/5 

q 

£ 

.£2 q 

q 

CPC 

.N 

C 

CQ 

C/5 

C/5 

q 

q q 
2 2 
030 

3 LG 

03 s 


38 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


b£ 

.5 x 

*-> o 


' a 


< 

O 

G 


£ 

Q 

X 


< 

O 

X 


a 


a 

x 


3 

X 


G 

X 


cc 

a 

cc 

2:2 

£3 -G 


G cc 
-gttH 

cc y 

3$ -3 

OCQ 


y 

y 

y 

> 


be 

JD 

> 

O 

-M 

a 

-j-> 

a 

y 

O 

9 

9 

o 

9 


G 

< 

y 

a 

9 

y 

X 

y 

X 

9 

a 

a 

a 

■+J 

G 


G 

cC 

be 

be 

a 

y 

X 

y 

X 

y 

X 

y 

O 

cc 

3 

’-c 

cC 

*“3 

s 

G 

< 

G 

< 

y 

X 


^G 

5 


tr 

be s- 

^ 73 

•2 '5 
2 X 
OH ^ 
~c >> 

-5 to 

OK 


CC 

G 


I- 

X 1c 
y 
cc *- 

'5° 

bj S- 

73 y 

OH x 
0 ? a 
O x 


^g 

X 


g 

X 


|| 

£a 


G 3 G 

X ^ ^ 


73 

G 


7§?2 

3 rG 
cc y 

beO 
G S-, 
O Qj 

•2 'a 

g x 

y 

73 <V 

OH ‘G 

cc r“ 

G£ 


a rq 




O 


a. 

2 


2 £ 


l ag 


03 

-G 

a 


G 

3 

o 


O O 


2 J 

O >> 

-b; _* 

0 *g: 

O X 


X 

J 


o 


cc o 

OX 


>> 

-G 

a 


cb 

O 


G 

G 

G 

cc 

X 


G 

-G 

H 

2 73 

G O) 

X y 
2 £ 
y-* 
G .2 
5 x: 

i° 

_ t-< 

G cC 

3 W 


o 

G 

3 c» 
b^X 
.q cc 

a £ 

•20 

^ "oc 
<n y 

X G 

CC _ 

? ”G 


Qj 


JD 

CC 

G 

2 


CC 


O O 


£ £ £ 


a 


CQ 

x 

G 


2 


CQ 

X 

2 


be 

G 

< 

a 

< 


a 

K 


G 

G 

CD 

X 

G 

3 

"g 


OS Ox O O 


•j^-G 

G 

X 

y 

a 

ga 

2 

G (U 

2 M 

G 5 - 

•2 y 
•g g 

2 £ 

Q7-G; 

§<x 

ts^ 

2 y 

G ^ 

G X 
5 cC 

O *H 

Cj H 

G y 

oa 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


39 



o 1 q 


t> CO 

d rH 


CO CO 

CO CO 


l> CO 

d co 


q io q q 

P CD <N 

Tt< t> LO I> 


£ 

% 


3 

X 


3 

X 


G 

X 


3 

X 


3 

x 


3 

X 


3 

x 


G G G C 3 

£ £ £ £ X 


O 

"C 


o 

03 

a 

X 


a 

cu 

Cd 


X 


<D 

cd 

o> 

o 

03 

Sh 

<v 

CO 

< 


<D 

43 


< 


O 


o> 

03 

0) 

o 

03 

O 

X 


<X) 

03 

a> 

o 

03 

a> 


O 


a> 


o 

2 

'a 

< 



X 


a> 

03 

a» 

o 

03 

"C 

£ 

o 

Sh 

C 



03 

<D 

P 


Si 

p 


a> 

T3 

X 

2 

-Q 

<D 

a; 

$H 

o 

cr 

o 

<D 

op 

c 

0) 

co 

CO 

X 

d 

co 

y 

u 

p 

03 

o 

CO 

Sh 

a> 

X 

CO 

CO s- 

s 2 

P 

co 

03 T3 

rrt 

d 

■2 

p 

.co 

3 

1 

a> 

a> 

z; 

P 


VU -i. 

S.I 


S-d- 


Oj 


ij. o 

co . .. 

Sffi-S 

Ckx 


•P co 

IS 

£ CO 

. co C 

Su 
§ >» 
3 'a 

Oco 


.5 § 

*x -O 
03 03 
p a> 


03 03 
N! a> 

P'k 
5 3 

Cj pH 


03 . 

Ch S- 

^X 

Cy • 
o X 

O —D 


a, 

c 


-2x 

§ s 

co ;£ 

2 5 
OQ 


X 


2 03 

5 j. 

. 3 ? « 


3 

a 

a> 

X 


o 

5 


“P43 


oo o 


o 

Q 


X 

XiJ 

03 P 


‘P 

< 

SH 

03 

P s- 

a; 

«H 


"S 

o2 

P 

<o 

X: 

=8 

£ 

o 

c 

.2 

O) d 

^x 

.03 . 

> 

•2 

s 

be 

•2 

•2 

•r* X 

<d 

^ b£ 

03 ,S 

C Q> 
.CO JsS 

* g 

CO 

S-, 

aj 

13 

P >> 

•2 S 

.0) 

•2 

co 

.CD 

? ^ 
cd 

2k 

Cj 

3 

03 

s 

co 

3 

S o 

03 43 

X 

03 

cd 

03 

P <D 
•2 o 

.J^’aS 

Q 

d 

< 

Qd 

Q 

Q 

Q 

<3 m 



X 

X 

.2- 
-p ~C 

3 £ 
‘hi) S 
gO 

>> 
co 0> 

x 3 

.p 2 

3(5 


Drosera erythrorhiza Lindley Droseraceae H(n) 10 0 

Red-ink Sundew 


40 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


be 

.5 "s 

t- O 
D -p 

£ d 

°Q« 

fa 


CD 

9 


3 

< 


CD 

9 

3 

*3 


CD 

o 


a 


<D 




<D 

c/p 

b£ 

3 

<3 


> 

o 


z 


cd 

O 


CD 

9 

be 

3 

< 


o 

o 


3 

03 

*3 


o 

CD 


Q 


< 

O 

fa 


«4-( O 


o 


D 


£ 

Q 

fa 


< 

O 

fa 


t> p 

d d 


03 

d 


LO 

O 

d 


p 

d 



co 

co 


H t> 

t-H Tt 


CO 

CO 


c 

£ 


.£ cs 5 03 s. 

£ K K £ £ x 


X 


3 

fa 


3 

£ 


3 

£ 


CD 

o3 

CD 

O 

03 

(D 

s. 

C 

s- 

Q 


05 

o 

fa 


CD 

03 

CD 

CD 

03 

3 

O 

bC 

>> 

'o 

0. 


3 

Pi 


CD 

03 

(D 

D 

.05 

’S 

03 

S-. 

D 

O 


o 



o 


fa 


fa 

pi 


J3 

03 

PI 


9? ^ 


"3 ^ 

P 

QQ 


■S® 


rs* 03 


.3 bp 
D 

S> 


j2 c 
fa £ 

p3 D 

fafa 


-3 

3 


CqQ bq 


=3 « 

w < 


cL « 

S' 0 
g c 
S ^ 

<L> tH 

•g §: 
fa fa 


PS 

9 


.3 O 

>2 £ 
3 o 
O *- 

■530 

E i 

^ s 

c S 
o 

fao 


Z 

S 


3 O 

•2 cn 

"G aj 
2 -2 
fafa 


O 

3 


3 > 
3 <3J 

b{9 

3 a, 

pa 

fafa 


O 

Q 


-3 

& 

3 

-3 

I 

§j 


3 3 

fafa 


a 

m 


3 

.3 

& 


Jix 

OS 03 


cq- 


►-J v 


O 


C/3 CO 
«D D 
D D 


cSfc o 


Hibbertia hypericoides (DC.) Benth. Dilleniaceae W(n) 58.8 - 3.0 c Aug-Dec 

Guinea Flower 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


41 


g 

g 


g 

G 

T> 


oi 


> 

o 

+-> 

> 

o 

© 


> 

© 

2 

o 

be 

2 

9 


o 

9 

-jp> 

o 

-+-S 

a 

& 

a 

-*p 

a 

a 

© 

CO 

G 

< 

S 

© 

CO 

© 

co 

© 

o 

© 

CO 


p 

© 


00 

O 


g 

p 

’■o 


G 


3 

X 


S 3 
ffi X 


3 

X 


a 

£ 


a 

cC 


>> 

s 


a 

>> 

O 


a 

>> 

o 


£1 

o 


© 

CQ 

§, 

•8 

Sj 

~o 

a 

,CQ 




3 


3 

c 

W © 

si 

© fa 

I « 

8 s 

ca .G 
** a 
.gO 

© © 
-O 

^ 3 


© 

© 

£ 0 
CO 3 

-s'3 

o © 

a 
5© ec 

.sg 

> ©H 

fc 2 

© "S 

*2 c 


-C 

g 

© 

CQ 

ca 

I 

© 

# 

as ca 
© © 
g > 

•UK 


G 

3 

X 

© 

3 

Q 

CO 

© 

.g 


CO 

© 

3; 

G 

«8 


C8 »Gi 
-©>2 
G3 


H 


j© 

o 
© ►C 

G ^ 


S © 
S> 

g G 

g;g 

^«S 


Q 

< 

pq 

pd 

£ 

-*-p> 

G 

© 

CQ 

o 

Q 

3 

G 

G 

to 

1 

S' 

+-> 

"a 

G 

o 

X 

r o 

a 

CQ 


3 

CO 

' 


-Q 

-2 b 

bo © 

.3 3 

G ed 
© CJ 

03 W 

-G J3 
© -*-j 
© C 
Q, C 

UcO 


CO 

Oh 

fa 


S) 


© 


*“■< c3 

5 o 

cc .^2 


^ © 
_P bp 
"G -Q 

<W 'C 

G ,0 

§ S -0 

i 2 o 
o 2 o 


.© G 
O 
co 


^ S g 

G © 's 
© ca .22 

io ^ O 

'la* 


© 

H 

■2 

G 


54609-4 


Jacksonia sericea Benth. Papilionaceae W(n) 5.9 - - r June-Oct 

Jacksonia sternbergiana Huegel Papilionaceae W(n) 11.7 - - f .Jan-Dec 

Stink Bush 


42 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 ( 1987 ) 


.2 -C 
O 

(H •£ 
^ 0> 

a 


< 

O 

a 




£ 

Q 

a 


< 

u 


a 


a 

>> 


cc 

>1 

a> 


3 

a 


cc 

-c 


> 

o 

z 


« 

■ — t- 
^ .CD 

£ a 

be c 

~ CD 

-p 

2 "f 

,CL C 


3 

£ 


a 


o 


ca O 

S3 

2 * 

3 CD 

5 £ 


> 

z 


p 

a 


a 

>> 

o 


— — 0» 


be 

p 

< 


OQ 


P> QJ 

Ps be 

gf 

g'g 

5 > 

|l 

~S to 

75 -p 

&3 
^ CO 


be 

& 

o 




G 





-M 

a 

< 


P 

*T> 


a> 

Q 



O 

9 

JD 

CD 

a 

Dec 

k 

5 

Sept 

-*-> 

CD 

o 

o 

o 

Aug 

a 

<D 

co 


00 

d 


p 

d 

CM 


*C « P 


£ 

a 


"P 

p 

a 


3, 

& 


•2 

"a> 

-Q 


O 

d 


3 c c p p 
£ £ X x X 


p 

o 

be 

a 

>> 


a 


a 

Sh 

a 

a 


• p p 

S p 


3 3 

a £ 


c 

p 

*“5 


3 d p c 

^ S| 


^40 


p cc 

a CO 


cc 

a 


"O ~ 
s-i P 
^ c/2 

Z a u 
, oo t: § 

"5 -i 'S 

2 d £ 

3 1! <g - 
a i2 ‘cO.S 


ca r > 5 

•PO 03 

s — N 

a.a 

c *P 

If £ 

be P 

2S 

p d d 

'•-' 3 C /3 
i2 03 ^ 

£3 t 

* 5 

<c ^ 

<CG 


a 

< 


a a 


c s 
£ % 


s s 


-P 

o 

a 

<33 


> 

o 

Z 


cc 

a 


i*> < 


cc 


~2 Z 

P 

be >•> 

<D !D 

P P 
■P C 

c^a 

£ Q, 
<b ~ 


Su ^a 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


43 


03 

£ 

£ 

p> 

?H 

a 

< 


b£ 

£ 

< 


03 

o 


a 


<v 


C/2 


03 

s 


> 

o 

2 


> 

0 

4-3« 


03 

-4-3> 

03 

03 

03 

> 

o 

2 

03 

9 


03 

Q 

9 

9 

2 

+-> 

a 

03 

02 

bC 

£ 

< 

Sept 

£ 

o3 

'~o> 

4-3 

a 

03 

02 

> 

o 

2 

a 

03 

02 


a> 

£ 

P 

*■£ 


zj 

o 


a 

03 


C/2 


03 CJ o 

O o O 


03 


O 


O 03 o 


O $H 


O 


CM 

p 

o 


CM O 

o co 


00 ’ — 1 *-0 

c-P cm 


p 

O 


p 1 1 1 P 

CO r_l 


Op p 

O ZD ZD 

CO 


CO 

CO 


p p 

lO CO 

CO 


p 1 P 

ZD CO 

y-i CM 


O 

O 

CO 


ZD 


S3 S S 

XXX £ 


"c S "S' c 5. 

X x x £ K 


CT - £ £ 

£ 1 $ & 



a 3 3 
£ £ £ 


a 

>> 

O 


03 

03 

a* 

03 

03 

Sh 

a> 

a 


o 


a> 

03 

a> 

ZJ 

03 

s- 

03 

4 - c > 

C/3 

< 


03 

-£ 


03 

IS 

£ 

Pi 


03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

'P 


03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

£ 


a 

03 

P< 


03 

o3 

03 

03 

.2 

’2 

3 

3 

-£ 

a 

o 

»H 

03 

02 


O Ph 


03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 


S-> 

Ph 


03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

3 

03 

03 

03 


03 

03 

03 


03 

03 

03 

43 

3 

3 

-2 

a 

3 

% 


o 

s 

B 

2 

Sh 

>> 

>» 

>> 

03 

4£ 

43 

43 

o 

3 


3 


P3 

pi 


.03 

Sa 


£3 

£ 

03 

P3 

£ 

PQ 

pi 


2 

i 03 

03 

4-4 T3 


-£ 

03 

PQ 


p 



s 

03 


Po 

03 

03 

43 

d 

ZJ 

03 

£ 

Q 

03 

C/2 

SO 


43 

03 

CQ 

S3 

H 


£ 

Sh 

03 

o 


03 


03 


^02 
Qj 03 


oj £ 

^ 03 

<i 02 


< 02 


•f=PP 

£ <v 
a; > 

PQ--S 

, . 03 
3< *-7 
03 4, 


”£ ^ ^ £ 


o' 


-a 

O 


"S s 

rc 

oS 


cq 

a 


5? r «> 
o W 
S T 3 


CcQ 


I 

Zd 


& 


CQ 

PS 


CQ 

PS 

<s 


i <s 

3 CQ 


B S 

s s 

=0 o 
0-0 


a, a, a, 


CQ 

PS 


-|2 
? 03 

s3 


~£ 

a 


03 

PQ 


£ 

a 


•S C/3 

bjD 3 
03 • C 

>‘3 

£ 03 Z £3 
03 


2 

03 

PJ 




PQ 

pi 

03 


03 Q3 
03 .> 

•S 3 

Q-Z 


44 


Kingia Vol. 1 , No. 1 (1987) 


bJD 

.S T3 

t- O 
<d 

£ S 
°PQ 

&h 


< 

O 


£ 

Q 

Pi 


< 

O 

Pi 


P-i 


a 

>> 

E-* 


a 

CO 


3 

E 


a3 

O 

PP 


03 


a 

X 


cO 

O 

04 


co 

Cl 

.03 

-s 

G 

O cO 

s ° 

s*- 

2 T 3 
t, a> 

o 
_ G 


3 

X 


n Ji 
-9 co 

^ CO 

hJ ^ 
— O 

•§ ^ 
s s 


<* § 
<5-2 
a,cq 


E 

co 

-G 

co 

t-> 

O 

<j 

Pi 


a 

-C 


r5 a 
co o 

•2 pp 

a ^ 

Oj cu 
^T3 

“a c 

0 

01 c o 


PQ 


^ QJ 
C?J 3 

-g -te 


QjO, 

1l 

"0 3 
O c d 
P*< £>4 


£ 

i 


CO 

O 

PL 4 


a 

CO 

-G 

cO 

(h 

o 

<■ 

Pi 


CO -o 

•G co 

Q. CD 

co,g 

co o 

8 -3 

•5 G 

<D 

1 2 
£c 


be 

G 

< 


G 

ffi 


35 

is 


pp 

Pi 


G be 
-S 'G 

G 

§ ^ 


« 


G 

G 

►“0 


j -3 

j 8 

Cl *9 


Cl, oj p o 


Ph 

co 

3 


a> 

G 

G 

O 

a> 

(h 

a 


> 

O 

4-a 

a 

G 

p 

CO 

p 

Q 

<c 


z 

CD 

CO 

O 

O 

CJ 

O 

> 

0 

2 

ti 

CO 

S 

Dec 

a 

CD 

CO 

be 

G 

< 



t-> 


^4 

< 4-4 



G G 

K CC 


CO 

-G 


CO 

s 

< 


03 

-C 


03 

s 

< 


X 


s 

c 


2 : 

3 J3 


O O) 

a. j 




-5 

'-2 VP co 

a* a, h 


o 

o 


S 3 
£ E 


>> 

S 


JD co 

"G S3 

G J2 


:g=o x 

t )3 3 CD 

"be^ co 

S'S .2 

S a C 5 
^ a o 

§P ^ 

O <D fb 

G 2 ce be 

P2 O <D 

Q-. Pi &i 


Pi 


pp 

P-. 

£ 


PQ 

Pi 


co 

•G 

Q, 


G 

£ 


T3 

O 

a 


-G 

o 


CO G 

oE 


CD c 

Eo 


^PQ 

Is 
2 ~ 
?S 03 
Qio 


G 

£ 


co 

IS 

o 

J2 

a 

G 

H 


X3 

G 

H 


O 

© 

LO 


^-G 

o G 

G,PQ 


G "G 

•S'S 

£5: 


H 


go 

Ji 

II 

O 3 

PiO 


W. Foulds. Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


45 


Q 

C3 


CD 

CD 

9 

G 

03 


> 

O 

£ 

a 

< 


> 

o 

2 

b£ 

P 

< 


cd 

9 

bD 

P 

< 


CD 

<V 

q 

G 

03 


> 

O 

Z 


CD 

9 

bfl 

P 

< 


O 

o 


bD 

G 

< 


> 

o 


CO 



CD 

O 


cd 

O 


CD 


CO CD 

i-H O 


00 CO 

© O 


CD LO 

O CO 

I> CM 


CO CO 

CO CO 


t> CO 

CD CO 


G 

E 


G 

E 


G 

E 


3 

E 


G G 

E E 


3 

E 


.2 

G 

o> 

'p 

o 

o 

o 


T3 

o 

o 

o 


a 

>> 

o 


JG 

a 

o 

>> 

03 

o 


o 

CO 


G 

< 


e 


03 

O 

Ph 


Oh Oh 


a> 



Stylidium brunonianum Benth. subsp. Stylidiaceae H(n) 3.3 0.05 

brunonianum 

Pink Fountain Trigger Plant 


Stylidium guttatum R.Br. Stylidiaceae H(n) 3.3 0.05 - - Oct-Nov 

Dotted Trigger Plant 


46 


Kingia Vol. 1 , No. 1 (1987) 


^G 

X 


3 

X 


G 

3 

cd 

s 


_c_ 

X 


c 


W 


3 

S 


c 

K 


O O 


3^3 

K ® E 


o< 

> £ 
C « 

2 ^ 


> 

o 

Z 


3 

E 


CO 

CD 


.2 

"3 


o. 

W 


>> 

a 


g 

< 


c 

< 


G 

< 


c 

< 


g 

< 


T3 

O 

-a 

a 


a 

< 


c 

< 


cq 

cd 


g 

3 


« c 
BJ J3 

CO Oh 


Q, bh 
g> _b£ 

g H 

•2 T3 
^3 a; 


O 

Q 


o 


£3 


>» H-V 

JJ2 N 

33 G 

.S 3 £ 

•—3 'cd 

cn & 

|x 

*3 TJ 
0- 1 
3 tH 

3 oj 
o £ 

^ O 
Cd G 

1-3 

P- G 


CQ 

cd 

3 


3 


"3 

O 

3 


33 

p3 


3 0 
0 Jr 

-2 


®o 

CCS 


3h c 

o' 

0) 

be 

Cd G 

0 03 

.Cd 

3 

0 

0 

O 

’5 "3 

3 ®- 
>, cd 

1 

rn 

■? & 


CQ 

cd 


Cd 


CO 


b£ 


CQ S $3 0 *5(7} E-« < E-h >. 


3 Oh 

o g 

§ i 
J.e 
Scj 


!=• 


•O’E 
co Oh 
5 bp 


££ c 

F? 2 

t-iCQ 


ffl >. 

oi3 


t, be 
O G 

^•c: 


3 T3 
3 £ 

co * 

3 g 
3 Oh 


£2 


CO 


O 

cd 



cd 

3 >> 
co 33 

^3 

G 

w 

CO 

3 

Cd 

~Cd 

.0 

’0 

s 

03 

3 

tn" 

« 

p~ 


*q3 

> 

CO 


"2 §Jj 
3, g 

CO '3 

ao 

3 

O) 

CO 

3 

33 

2 ' 

•3 

Q^Q, 

0 *5 

C CO 

2 c3 

e elatio 
utumn 

S te 

3 

c 

Cd 

|<S 

G< 

3 G 

3 

fS'S 

3 

JO 

-G* 

-G 

O 

2 

•st: 

2 1 

3 ^ 

.0 -2 

*h 0 

e-h 

G* 

3-i 

E-P 

^ >< 


-G 

O 

CO 


Q, 

3 


3 > 
3^ 


C 0 


Ursinia anthemoides (L.) Poiret Asteraceae H(i) 33.3 1.7 0.03 - Sept-Oct 

Ursinia 


W. Foulds, Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


47 


O 

O 


o 

O 


o 

O 


o 

O 


O 2 


-Q 

cC 


iO 

CM 


CD 00 
O rH 


O CO O 

O CO O 

’-'CM O 


Oh 


O 

Ph 


3 

K 


p 

G 

cC 

a 


O 


£ G 
K X 


G 

£ 


O 


G 

CC 

X 


; © 


o 


0) 

°° 8 
:§ £ 
S 

s- 

O 03 

-o _ 
03 

II 


g 

o 


-s cn 
J3 CC 


m 

03 


.03 _C 

&J 

-q CQ 
B "p 

^ 2 


to 

S 


CQ 


Vl ^ 

.to c 

5 2 

be 

h <S 


T3 

G 

w 


0 

£ >> 
°_D 

■sS 

P CJ 
03 3 


Appendix 2. Name, family, type of species associated with Lake near Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 



a 

C/2 


fa 


CO C 

c £ 

a> a) 

> a 

03 S 
£ 


p cu 
bL— 
03 

S3 _ 
^C/2 


>> 

t-H 

3 

cd 


CC 


c - 

<D C 
n a» 
oO 

Mjt 


O a> C/2 


CQ 


•33 bX) 

03 a> 
^C/2 
to 

33 03 
k, CD 

Qj r- 

c ll 

O C/2 


CQ 

cd 


o 

-CJ 

to ^3 
O to 
“3: 3 

§1 


CQ 

ffj 


o 

-33 


CQ 

cd 


•=3 3 


3 T3 
O cd 
S3 C 


^ K -d CQ 


•5 £ 

.g 2 

§3^ 
3J^ 
cb £ 


O cd 


03 

l 

Q. 

•2 

"g & 

03 t-. 

-c: a> 

a 

03 

03 i“\ 

O £m 

3 o 
-2 & 
Cd § 

c /2 


3 

a-* 

CO o 

C O 
°Q 

"id 

ll 

csu 


Schoenoplectus validus (M. Vahl) Cyperaceae H(n) 

A. Love & D. Love 
River Clubrush 


Kingia 1(1) 49-74(1987) 


49 


Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 

J. P. Tyler 

Dampier Salt (Operations) Pty. Limited, P.0. Box 285, Dampier, Western Australia 6713 


Abstract 

Tyler J, P. Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod. Kingia 1(1): 49-74 (1987). The vegetation adjacent to 
Lake MacLeod was assessed and documented from 1980-1984. A total of 269 flora species were collected from 
the area and are currently housed in the Dampier Salt Research Laboratory at Dampier. 

The dynamics of the vegetation were assessed using permanent quadrats in four vegetatively distinct areas. 
For convenience of study, the vegetation was classified in three categories, namely herbs, shrubs less than 1 
metre high, and shrubs greater than 1 metre high. The herbs exhibited a distinct annual pattern, with peak 
numbers of individuals and species occurring in early spring. The number of small shrub species fluctuated 
with rainfall regardless of the season. Large shrubs exhibited very slow growth rates and few recruitments or 
deaths. 

The impact of grazing animals was assessed using exclosed and unexclosed areas. No significant grazing 
pressure was found. The Lake MacLeod shrublands were found to regenerate very slowly if degraded by fire. 
This is due to the inherently slow growth rates of the shrub species. 


Introduction 

Lake MacLeod is a 2000 km 2 natural coastal salina some 40 km north of Carnarvon. 
It is separated from the Indian Ocean to the south by a thirty metre high ridge of white 
sand dunes called the Bejaling Dunes. These are around 2 km wide. To the west of Lake 
MacLeod lies the Quobba Ridge, a barrier separating Lake MacLeod from the Indian 
Ocean. The red sand dunes of the Quobba Ridge run parallel to the coast and merge with 
the Bejaling Dunes. The dunes of the Quobba Ridge overlie limestone which is fre- 
quently exposed as rocky outcrops. 

Lake MacLeod is in an arid region with an average rainfall of around 200 millimetres 
per year. It occurs in the major soil zone called desert-steppe. These soils show no 
characteristic profile due to an absence of leaching and high wind action, and are red to 
reddish-brown in colour (Prescott 1952). The scrub with associated saltbush, typical of 
these soils, is in evidence near Lake MacLeod. 

There are few published accounts on the vegetation near Lake MacLeod and the area 
has not been extensively surveyed. This study concerns itself with the vegetation of the 
Quobba Ridge and the Bejaling Dunes. Both of these areas lie within the Quobba Station 
pastoral lease and are used as grazing land for sheep. The area also contains feral goats, 
rabbits and kangaroos. 

The purpose of the study is to document the vegetation and floristics, and to assess 
the impact of grazing animals. 


50 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Materials and Methods 
1. Vegetation classification 

The vegetation was classified into three categories for convenience of study. 

These were as follows: 

(a) Shrubs greater than one metre high 

These were well established shrubs and trees. 

(b) Shrubs less than one metre high 

These were distinctly woody plants less than one metre high. This category in- 
cluded a number of species such as Stemodia grossa, Solatium lasiophvllum and 
Acanthocarpus preissii which even when well established did not reach one 
metre in height. It also included woody annuals such as Ptilotus and Olearia 
and the seedlings of all the larger shrubs. 

(c) Herbs 

This category included all annual species with soft non-woody stems and all the 
grasses. 


2. Permanent Quadrats 

Three permanent quadrats were established in visually-assessed distinctive veg- 
etation zones on the Quobba Ridge. A fourth was established in the Bejaling Dunes (Fig- 
ure 1). The 20 m x 20 m permanent quadrats were pegged in July 1980 using surveyors 
pegs and marking tape. 


Quadrat 1 Environs 

Quadrat 1 was located on the Quobba Ridge, adjacent to the old salt haulage road pre- 
viously used by Dampier Salt (Operations) Pty Ltd. This road was no longer in use and 
the area was remote from salt field activities. The quadrat was situated in an area of 
dense Acacia scrub. There were no sheep in the area due to a lack of drinking water, 
although goats and kangaroos had been sighted. The red sandy soils had a pH around 
6.9. 


Quadrat 2 Environs 

Quadrat 2 was located in the Bejaling Dunes. The vegetation was mainly salt bush 
( Atriplex and Rhagodia spp.) interspersed with Acacia spp., Banksia ashbyi and 
Thryptomene baeckeacea. The white sandy soils were alkaline with a mean pH of 8.0. 
Sheep, feral goats and rabbits were present in the Bejaling Dunes. 


Quadrat 3 Environs 

Quadrat 3 was situated on the Quobba Ridge, north of the present salt haulage road 
from the Lake MacLeod mine site to Cape Cuvier. Like quadrat 1, some twenty kilo- 
metres to the north, it had neutral soils of pH 7.0. The vegetation was open Acacia scrub 
and Triodia grassland. A bore about a kilometre from the quadrat provided water for 
sheep and feral goats, which were plentiful in the area. 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


51 



10 

15 

20 

25 

30 

35 


Figure 1. Locality map showing study areas. 


52 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


C3 

.2 

cd 

-t-a 

U 

*bc 

o 


T3 

o 

V 

1-1 

o 

cd 

s 

0) 

p* 

cd 

h-3 


be 

C 

'S 

cd 

Ph 


cd 


-O 

cd 

H 


> LO 

c 

Z CO 


>> 

3 


s 

=3 


a 

< 


-o 

a> 

Ph 


> 

< 


00 

05 


00 

05 


CO 

00 


iO 

05 


05 

CO 

CO 


O 

c 

05 


> 

o 


Z 


o 


o 

O 


CO 

d 




> 

c o 
Z 


O 


o 

O 


CO 

t> 


bb 

P 

< 


3 o 

i— d 


a o 
< 




_Q 

a> 


Ph 


d 

cd 


oo 

cd 

05 



Table 2. Number and change in number of shrub species greater than 1 m high recorded in 20 x 
20 m permanent quadrats from 1980 to 1982. 


J.p. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


53 


G 

03 

-G 

O 


03 CM 
CO 
XJ 03 

^ r—H 

3 

O' 


CO 

03 


b£ 

G 

cC 

o 


03 CM 

T3 03 
03 T - 1 

3 

O' 


o 

CO 

03 


b£ 

G 

03 

X 

o 

CM 

ts cm 
±3 00 

T3 03 
03 i—i 

3 

o 


O 

00 

03 


b£ 

G 

cd 

-G 

O 


03 CM 
CO 
T3 03 


3 

O 


^ CM CO CM r 


m co t- 


CM t' m CM T 


CM H CO CM CO H rf 


CM O H CM CO O iO O 


'+ ° + + 


CO O 1— ( CM C" 


I §■ 

ci> a 

a § 

§ §J 
CD ^ 
) “o CD 


p 

_ 

111 - 

C 3 


O > 

-2-0 


v. P~5 c 
* - - § a 


• 2 -2 .0-2 
2 o'o ^ 
a a c c 

CD CD CD 


't: ■'C 


'3 S 3 g § ~ 
g.S s £vs> 

«— tc ~ Cr a r 0 


r a fc 
; ~g 2? 
o 

! 

Aj -lO W 

: o a 
; o c_> jj 

; <D C3 Q 




£ fc a 5 

■o g-w^- 

P-S oT3 

b a. t»i 

^ p c 
^ -5 -£ C3 


CD O 


a a 

<S CD 

s a-se 

? _T? CD 
C rw 


2 

2 ^ CM 


C 

5, o 


a a-g g. 

CD CD J 2 n 

2 2 p-b 

CD CD *~S~ 

co co co 


,G 

3 

i-> 

~G 

co 

6 

2 


a 

co 

6 

2 


o 

H 


54 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Quadrat 4 Environs 

Quadrat 4 was situated less than fifty metres from quadrat 3, but on the southern side 
of the salt haulage road. A fire in 1979 only burnt the area south of the haul road. The 
soil and vegetation type were similar to those of quadrat 3, but with far fewer shrubs. A 
number of plant species common on the north side of the road in a good season, had not 
been sighted in the previously burnt area. These included Thysanotus speckii, 
Dichopogon sp. and Dianella revoluta. 

The following information was recorded once monthly for 26 months. 

(a) The area covered by shrubs greater than one metre in height was mapped onto 
graph paper. The positioning of the shrubs and their sizes were obtained by 
pacing. The maps illustrate recruitment and death of shrubs. 

(b) A list of all shrubs species less than one metre high in the quadrat was compiled. 

(c) All herb species present in the quadrat were listed. 


3. Exclosure Experiments 

One chicken wire exclosure 3mx3mxlm was established in each survey area adjac- 
ent to the 20 m x 20 m permanent quadrat. Unexclosed control quadrats were pegged ad- 
jacent to the exclosures. A once monthly survey of all quadrats was undertaken. The 
area covered by shrubs greater than one metre high was mapped. Shrub species less than 
one metre high and herb species were listed and quantified. 

4. Flora List 

A list of all flowering plants present on the Quobba Ridge and the Bejaling Dunes was 
compiled over four years from 1980 to 1984. Plants were mainly collected on the 
monthly quadrat survey, but extra surveys were undertaken following any period of 
heavy rain. Occasional specimens were collected on daily journeys to and from the salt 
field. A habit photograph of most species was taken and pressed specimens of each 
species are housed in the company herbarium. Specimens were identified using pub- 
lished keys, with doubtful identifications being verified at the Western Australian Her- 
barium (PERTH). All plant species are listed in Appendix 1. Nomenclature follows 
Green (1985). 

Table 3. Presence of shrubs greater than 1 m high over the whole study period (1980-1982) and 
similarity of the four permanent quadrats based on species presence. 


Quadrat 

12 3 4 


Chenopodiaceae 

Atriplex aff. cinerea 
Rhagodia baccata 

Goodeniaceae 

Scaevola crassifolia 
Scaevola spinescens 
Scaevola tomentosa 

Mimosaceae 
Acacia coriacea 
Acacia ligulata 
Acacia sclerosperma 
Acacia tetragonophylla 

Myrtaceae 

Thryptomene baeckeacea 


+ 

+ 


+ 

+ 

+ + + 


+ 

+ 

+ 


- 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


55 


Table 3 (continued). Presence of shrubs greater than 1 m high over the whole study period (1980- 
1982) and similarity of the four permanent quadrats based on species presence. 



1 

Quadrat 

2 3 

4 

Proteaceae 

Banksia ashhyi 

Grevillea wickhamii 

+ 

+ 


Santalaceae 

Exocarpos aphyllus 

Santalum lanceolatum 


+ + 


Sapindaceae 

Dodonaea amblyophylla 

Heterodendrum oleaefolium 

+ 

+ 


Solanaceae 

Solanum orbiculatum 


+ 


Surianaceae 

Stvlobasium spathulatum 


+ 


Tiliaceae 

Corchorus walcottii 


+ 


Thymelaeaceae 

Pimelea microcephala 


+ + 


Total Number Per Quadrat: 

8 

13 10 

1 


All species with the exception of Rhagodia baccata and Scaevola tomentosa in Quadrat 2 were present in 
the quadrats for the whole of the study period. 

Similarity index = Number in common x 2 x 100 
total number m both 

The maximum possible similarity between two samples is 100% 

Quadrat 1/Quadrat 2 - 38.1% Quadrat 2/Quadrat 3 - 52.2% 

Quadrat 1 /Quadrat 3 - 44.4% Quadrat 2/Quadrat 4 - 14.3% 

Quadrat 1 /Quadrat 4 = 22.2%- Quadrat 3/Quadrat 4 = 18.2% 


Table 4. Presence of shrubs less than 1 m high over the whole study period ( 1 980- 1 982) and similarity 
of the four permanent quadrats based on species presence. 




Quadrat 



1 

2 

3 

4 

Amaranthaceae 





Ptilotus obovatus 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

Ptilotus villositlorus 

Ptilotus sp. 1 (J.P.T. 133 Dampier) 

+ 

+ 



Ptilotus sp. 2 (J.P.T. 134 Dampier) 

+ 




Asteraceae 





Olearia imbricata 




+ 

Boraginaceae 





Halgania preissiana 



+ 


Caesalpiniaceae 





Cassia oligophylla 


+ 

+ 


Chenopodiaceae 





Chenopodium desertorum 

Einadia nutans 


+ 


- 

Enchylaena tomentosa 

C8m 

C9m 

Cl2m 


Maireana tomentosa 

+ 




Rhagodia baccata 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

Salsola kali 


+ 



56 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Table 4 (continued). Presence of shrubs less than 1 m high over the whole study period (1980-1982) 
and similarity of the four permanent quadrats based on species presence. 


Quadrat 

12 3 4 


Dasypogonaceae 

Acanthocarpus preissii 

Euphorbiaceae 
Euphorbia atoto 

Goodeniaceae 
Dampiera incana 
Scaevola crassifolia 
Scaevola restiacea 
Scaevola spinescens 
Scaevola tomentosa 
Scaevola sp. (J.P.T. 235 Dampier) 

Loranthaceae 

Amyema sp. (J.P.T. 157 Dampier) 
Malvaceae 

Abutilon geranioides 
Hibiscus drummondii 

Mimosaceae 
Acacia coriacea 
Acacia ligulata 
Acacia tetragonophylla 

Myrtaceae 

Thryptomene baeckeacea 

Phormiaceae 

Dianella revoluta 

Proteaceae 

Grevillea wickhamii 
Hakea stenophylla 

Santalaceae 

Exocarpos aphyllus 
Santalum lanceolatum 

Sapindaceae 

Diplopeltis eriocarpa 
Dodonaea amblyophylla 
Heterodendrum oleaefolium 

Scrophulariaceae 
Stemodia grossa 

Solanaceae 

Solatium Iasiophyllum 
Solatium orbiculatum 

Surianaceae 

Stylobasium spathulatum 

Thymelaeaceae 

Pimelea microcephala 

Tiliaceae 

Corchorus elachocarpus 
Corchorus waleottii 

Total Number per Quadrat 


Cl3m 

C + 

+ 


+ 




+ 

+ 


C 


+ 


+ 

+ 

+ 



+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 



+ 



+ 

+ 

c 


+ 




+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 


+ 

c 

+ 

+ 


+ 

+ 



+ 


+ 


+ 

+ 

+ 


+ 


+ 



+ 

+ 



+ 


+ 

Cl5m 

C9m 

C9m 



C6m 

+ 


+ 

+ 


+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

C7m 

+ 

+ 

+ 


C 

C 

19 

24 

22 

21 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


57 


Species designated C were present in the quadrat continuously since the beginning of the study. 

Species designated Cxm were present continuously for the final x months of the study. 

c- .. . , Number in common 0 1fin 

Similarity index = ■ : — ; — - six 100 

total number in both 

The maximum possible similarity between two samples is 100% 

Quadrat 1 /Quadrat 2 - 55.8% Quadrat 2/Quadrat 3 = 56.5% 

Quadrat 1 /Quadrat 3 - 53.7% Quadrat 2/Quadrat 4 - 48.9% 

Quadrat 1 /Quadrat 4 = 50.0% Quadrat 3/Quadrat 4 = 69.8% 


Table 5. Presence of herbs over the whole study period (1980-1982) and similarity of the four 
permanent quadrats based on species presence. 



1 

Quadrat 

2 3 

4 

Aizoaceae 




Disphyma crassifolium 


+ 


Anthericaceae 




Dichopogon sp. (J.P.T. 98 Dampier) 


+ 


Apiaceae 




Trachymene pilosa 


+ 

+ 

Asteraceae 




Angianthus cumringhamii 



+ 

Brach ycome iberidi folia 

+ 

+ + 


Brachvcome latisquamea 

+ 

+ + 

+ 

Calocephalus brownii 


+ 


Gnephosis gvnotricha 


+ 

+ 

Helipterum bumboldtianuni 


+ 


Podotheca angustifolia 


+ 


Senecio lautus 


+ + 


Sonchus oleraceus 


+ 


Waitzia acuminata 

+ 


+ 

Boraginaceae 




Heliotropium paniculatum 



+ 

Brassicaceae 




Sisymbrium irio 


+ 


Campanulaceae 




Wahlenbergia gracilis 


+ 


Chenopodiaceae 




Dysphania plantaginella 


+ 

+ 

Euphorbiaceae 




Euphorbia drummondii 


+ + 

+ 

Gentianaceae 




Centaurium tenuiflorum 


+ 


Geraniaceae 




Erodium cygnorum 

+ 

+ 


Goodeniaceae 




Goodenia berardiana 

+ 



Lauraceae 




Cassytha aurea 

+ 



Lobeliaceae 




Lobelia heterophylla 

+ 

+ 

+ 


54609-5 


58 


Kingia Vol. 1) No. 1 (1987) 


Table 5 (continued). Presence of herbs over the whole study period (1980-1982) and similarity of the 
four permanent quadrats based on species presence. 


Quadrat 



1 

2 

3 

4 

Papilionaceae 





Glycine clandestina 

Glvcine tabacina 

+ 

4- 


+ 

Indigofera georgei 


+ 



Lotus australis 


+ 



Swainsona kingii 


+ 



Poaceae 





Aristida contorta 


+ 

+ 

+ 

Cenchrus ciliaris 


+ 

+ 

+ 

Eragrostis australasica 

+ 

+ 


+ 

Eragrostis eriopnda 

+ 


+ 

Eragrostis japonica 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

Eulalia fulva 



+ 

+ 

Sorghum plumosum 

+ 

+ 

+ 


Triodia basedowii 

+ 


+ 

+ 

Triodia pungens 

Triodia sp. 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

Triraphis sp. (J.P.T. 109 Dampier) 


+ 


+ 

Portulacaceae 





Calandrinia polyandra 

+ 

+ 

+ 


Solanaceae 





Nicotiana simulans 


+ 

+ 

+ 

Stackhousiaceae 





Stackhousia sp. 1 (J.P.T. 159 Dampier) 


+ 



Zygophvllaceae 



+ 


Zvgophyllum fruticulosum 


+ 

+ 

Total Number per Quadrat 

14 

24 

24 

22 


Similarity index = Number in common x 2 x 100 
total number in both 

The maximum possible similarity between two samples is 100% 

Quadrat 1/Quadrat 2 = 26.3% Quadrat 2/Quadrat 3 = 45.8% 

Quadrat 1 /Quadrat 3 = 47.4% Quadrat 2 /Quadrat 4 = 47.8% 

Quadrat 1/Quadrat 4 = 38.9% Quadrat 3/Quadrat 4 = 69.6% 


Table 6. Changes in number of shrubs less than 1 m high in exclosed and unexclosed quadrats from 

spring, 1983 to summer, 1984. 

(a) Site 1 


06.09.83 15.02.84 

Species Exclosed Unexclosed Exclosed Unexclosed 


Acanthocarpus preissii 

Corchorus walcottii 

1 

1 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

Ptilotus sp. (J.P.T. 133 Dampier) 

23 

11 

0 

0 

Unknown sp. 

1 

1 

1 (dying) 

1 

0 

New emergent 

1 

0 

0 

Total 

27 

14 

2 

2 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


59 


(b) Site 2 


Species 

06.09.83 

Exclosed Unexclosed 

Exclosed 

15.02.84 

Unexclosed 

Enchylaena tomentosa 

1 

5 

dying 

dying (clump 

Rhagodia baccata 

0 

% cover 
of quadrat 

0 

% cover 
of quadrat 

Salsola kali 

1 

3 

0 

3 

Stemodia grossa 

9 

4 

3 

3 

Total (excluding Rhagodia) 

11 

12 

5 

6 


(c) Site 3 


Species 

06.09.83 

Exclosed Unexclosed 

Exclosed 

15.02.84 

Unexclosed 

Enchvlaena tomentosa 

1 

0 

2 

2 

Ptiiotus obovatus 

3 

2 

0 

0 

Rhagodia baccata 

3 

0 

1 

1 

Scaevola tomentosa 

1 

1 

0 

0 

Stemodia grossa 

1 (large 
clump) 

0 

1 (large 
clump) 

0 

Total 

9 

3 

4 

3 


(d) Site 4 


06.09.83 

15.02.84 

Species 

Exclosed 

Unexclosed 

Exclosed 

Unexclosed 

Acacia iigulata 

0 

1 

0 

0 

Corchorus eiachocarpus 

0 

1 

0 

1 

Dampiera incana 

4 

9 

6 

8 

Diplopeltis eriocarpa 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Melaleuca cardiophvila 

1 

0 

2 

0 

Scaevola restiacea 

0 

2 

0 

1 

Solanum lasiophvllum 

3 

0 

2 

0 

Unknowns 

3 

0 

2 

0 

Total 

12 

14 

11 

11 


Table 7. Changes in number of herbs 

in exclosed and unexclosed quadrats from spring, 1983 to 
summer, 1984. 

(a) Site 1 

Species 

06.09.83 

Exclosed Unexclosed 

Exclosed 

15.02.84 

Unexclosed 

Calandrinia polvandra 

43 32 

0 

0 

Goodenia berardiana 

1 0 

0 

0 

Gnephosis gvnotricha 

2 11 

0 

0 

Lobelia heterophylla 

11 4 

0 

0 

Sonchus oleraceus 

0 1 

0 

0 

Triodia pungens 

8 6 

9 

5 

Total 

65 54 

9 

5 


60 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


(b) Site 2 


Species 

06.09.83 

Exclosed Unexclosed 

15.02.84 

Exclosed Unexclosed 

Calandrinia polyandra 

17 

7 

0 

0 

Calocephalus brownii 

90 

60 

0 

0 

Eragrostis japonica 

Sparse 

Sparse 

0 

0 


covering 

covering 



Ptilotus villosiflorus 

15 

4 

0 

0 

Total (excluding Eragrostis) 

122 

71 

0 

0 


(c) Site 3 


06.09.83 15.02.84 


Species 

Exclosed 

Unexclosed 

Exclosed 

Unexclosed 

Brachycome latisquamea 

9 

4 

0 

0 

Cenchrus ciliaris 

80% 

20% 

dying 

absent 


cover 

cover 



Gnephosis g\'notricha 

5 

0 

0 

0 

Nicotiana simulans 

3 

0 

0 

0 

Sonchus oleraceus 

0 

1 

0 

0 

Sorghum plumosum 

0 

7 

0 

0 

Triodia pungens 

4 

4 

0 

0 

Triodia wiseana 

0 

0 

8 

10 

Zygophyllum fruticulosum 

0 

3 

0 

0 

Total (excepting Cenchrus) 

12 

19 

8 

10 


(d) Site 4 


06.09.83 


15.02.84 

Species 

Exclosed 

Unexclosed 

Exclosed 

Unexclosed 

Eragrostis eriopoda 

0 

4 

0 

0 

Euphorbia drummondii 

0 

4 

0 

0 

Gnephosis g\-notricha 

11 

3 

0 

0 

Indigo f era georgei 

4 

1 

0 

0 

Lobelia heterophvlla 

1 

1 

0 

0 

Triodia pungens 

3 

0 

5 

0 

Triodia wiseana 

23 

25 

35 

30 

Zygophyllum fruticulosum 

1 

1 

0 

0 

Total 

43 

39 

40 

30 


Results and Discussion 

Quadrat 1 was situated in an area of dense Acacia scrub. Grazing pressure in this area 
was very low due to alack of nearby drinking water. Low grazing pressure was confirmed 
by the exclosure experiment which showed no obvious changes in the vegetation of the 
unexclosed plot without corresponding changes within the exclosure (Tables 6 and 7). 
The species diversity of the large shrubs within Quadrat 1 increased by 1 during the 
study period, and the number of individual shrubs increased by 3 (Table 2). There was 
no appreciable change in the area covered by any of the large shrubs, illustrating very- 
slow growth rates (Figure 2). 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


61 



rO 

o 


e So 
S S c-o 


C 3 d; 

'=* C: C 

2 s 

5-2 o 


a 

1 'ssg. 

Issl 1 

o; cot/5 6- 


lO CD t" 00 


CM 

CO 

03 


'P 

G 

cd 

o 

CO 


a 

p 

< 

he 

g 

'C 

p 

~o 


'P 
c d 
P 
cr 


a 

G 



a 


a 

G 

< 


a >>•- 


•2 

Q I. 

cu 
. a 

■ a- 

at o 
^ 5 c c- 

03 P-££ 3 

s S?-h| 

sa o 

d; a 

• 2 -2 2 s 5 

o O 2 dJ 
a o cu •*- 
o o 

r-( CM CO ^ 


-Q 

p 


'p 

G 

cd 

G 

O 


O 




62 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 




J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 




3 

.Of 


« 'S. 
o,t: & a 

o' C 

S B o. 

S CR C 


C: co 
3 

^ L, 

2 -§ 


ca Q. 


5 o 

- ^ o o ^ 
^ rq O Q kq 


< <M CO rf LO 


63 


T3 

C 

a 

o 

oo 

<T) 


3 

< 

bfl 

a 

"E 

3 

T3 


3 

cr 


Q. 

a 


S 

H 

c 

c C 


-D 

3 


fl 

CC 

c 

o 


c 

hJ 


64 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 




£ 

a 


• 2 
5 

O 

O 


Figure 5. Location and size of shrubs greater than lm high in permanent quadrat 4 during August, 1980 and October, 1982. 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


65 


Quadrat 2 was situated in the Bejaling Dunes. Sheep, goats and kangaroos were all 
seen near the quadrat during the study, but grazing pressure remained low. With the ex- 
ception of a sheep trail through the unexclosed plot near Quadrat 2, there was no obvious 
influence of grazing animals on the vegetation. Changes within the unexclosed plot par- 
alleled those within the exclosure (Tables 6 and 7). Five individual shrubs were recruited 
into the large shrub category in Quadrat 2 over the study period (Table 2). These in- 
cluded Scaevola tomentosa and Rhagodia baccata, species which were not previously 
present in the large shrub category. The growth rates of large shrubs in the Bejaling 
Dunes were slow (Figure 3). 

Quadrat 3 was subjected to intermittent grazing pressure due to the proximity of 
water. This grazing pressure affected the herbaceous plants, such as Cenchrus ciliaris 
but not the shrubs (Tables 6 and 7). All the Cenchrus ciliaris within the unexclosed plot 
disappeared within three months, while the floor of the exclosure had an 80% covering 
of this species. There was no evidence of grazing pressure on shrubs over the study 
period, and an additional three individual large shrubs became established within Quad- 
rat 3 (Table 2). Quadrant 3 also demonstrated very slow growth rates for large shrubs 
(Figure 4). 

Quadrat 4 was situated less than 50 metres from Quadrat 3, but on the other side of 
the road. A fire in 1979 had destroyed all but one of the large shrubs in this area. There 
was no recruitment of large shrubs within this quadrat during the study period despite 
the presence of seedlings of many of the larger shrub species, e.g. Acacia ligulata, 
Pimelea microcephala , Dodonaea amblyophylla and Exocarpos aphyllus (Tables 2 and 
4). The area was 70% similar to Quadrat 3 in the category of shrubs less than 1 metre 
high. The slow rate of recovery can be considered a function of the slow growth rates of 
the shrubs (Figure 5). The only evidence of grazing in this area was on soft spinifex 
( Triodia pungens) (Table 7). This was completely absent from the unexclosed plot but 
there were five plants within the exclosure. 

The number of shrub species less than 1 metre high fluctuated broadly with rainfall 
regardless of the seasons (Table 1, Figures 6 and 7). Some of the plants were woody 
annuals such as Olearia and Ptilotus which would germinate, flower and set seed very 
quickly following rain, and then die off in the drier weather. The majority of the peren- 
nial small shrub species that were present continuously in the quadrats were rep- 
resented by individuals that were well established from the start. These included 
Acanthocarpus preissii and Thryptomene baeckeacea in Quadrat 2; Corchorus walcottii 
in Quadrat 3; and Acanthocarpus preissii, Corchorus walcottii, Dampiera incana and 
Hibiscus drummondii in Quadrat 4. As only the presence and absence of species was 
noted, it is not possible to ascertain whether any new individuals of these species became 
established during the study period. A number of other perennial shrubs species were 
present continuously for six months or more at the end of the study. These included 
Acanthocarpus preissii in Quadrat 1; Enchylaena tomentosa in Quadrats 1, 2 and 3; 
Corchorus elachocarpus in Quadrat 2; Solanum lasiophyllum in Quadrats 3 and 4; 
Solanum orbiculatum in Quadrat 3; and Stemodia grossa in Quadrat 2. 

The number of herb species in the permanent quadrats fluctuated seasonally with 
maximum numbers occurring around September (Figures 6 and 7). About 25% of the 
herb species were composites and most of these, presumably for similar reasons to those 
found by Mott (1972), would only germinate and flower during winter. About 25% of the 
herb species were grasses. These would germinate at any time of the year following rain. 
They were the major component of the summer herb population following rain and, with 
the composites, formed the major component of the winter population of herbs. Unlike 
the Murchison area examined by Mott (1972), there was no obvious winter dormancy 
exhibited by the grasses. One possible reason was the higher winter temperatures of the 
area around Lake MacLeod. Most of the remaining species were also winter annuals. 


QUADRAT 1 QUADRAT 2 

SHRUBS i m THAN CHE METRE HICH SHRUBS LESS THAN ONE METRE HIGH 


66 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 




i\\\\\\\v\\\\\\\w 


INNNNNNNNNXNSXXVXXSSSN 


hNNNNXXNXXNNNNXNNXNXXSN 


kWWWWV^ 




hNNNNNNNNNNNN 


hNNNNNNNNNNXS 


INNNNNNNNNNNNNS 


k\\\\\\\\v\\.g 


KSSSXSSSSSXSSN- 


SXXSXXS-SXN 


INNNNXNS - 


K\\\\\\\V( 


NWWWVWWVWX 


IWWWWIVs - 


hNSNNNNNNNNNS -^ 


IWWWWWV 


iwwwww - 


kWWWWXW - 


IWWWWWVWWW 


K\\\\\\\X 


t — r 

) H « 


i — i — i — i — i — i — r 




® ^ N 


oonkcminN 


- o 

LWVs - 

- in 

INNNNNNk- 

- < 

kNNXXNXNS 

- -» 

WXXNNNXSS- 

- ~> 

[NNNNNNV 

- 3 

IXXE- 

- < 

kSNNNNXN'S- 

- 2 

(NWS- 

- b. 

fS3- 

" 

t\XS- 


£E- 

- 2 t- y 

(\\\k- 

-o < a 

kSSSSSSSSSSSk 

-m ££ w 

IkNNNNNNNNNXXNNNXS- 

- < Q« 

LNNNNNNNNNSS- 

- -> •< y 

kSXWk- 

3 

E- 

-2 O 

KSS- 

- < 

ESS- 

- 3 

E- 

- u. 

SSS- 

- “» 

kWWS- 

- Q 

LSXXS- 

- z 

KNNNNNNNNk- 

- o 

kSSSSSSSSSSSk 

- m 

kSSkkkkSSSSSSSSSSSSS- 

-< 




B k « O ^ n N 




hNNNNNNNNSXSXNN^ - o 

IWWVWWVyvX) < 


kSSNNSNSXS 


IWWWW^W’vV^ - 


kXXSXXXXN-a 


ISSNSNNNNNXXVXS* 


INNNNNNNNSNNXXX'E E - 3 


[SNNSSW - u. 


XSNXNNN - 


- o 

KWWWXTT Z 
k\\\V\\SS-o 




kSXXXXXXS 


IWWWVs 


ESSSSS-3 


KSSS-< 


essxxs 




KXWWWX 


S NN NNNXSXS 




kXSXXXXX-S - ° 


-i — i — i — I — i — r 


H H W 



< I 

<1 

3 1 

o 


innnnxxs- 

kSXSXS- 

innnxxe- 

kSNNNNNXS- 

LSXXS- 

1NNNS- 

(XXXS- 

LSSSX- 

ES- 

SES- 

ISSXS- 

INNSXVE- 

innnnxxs- 

kSWSSSSSXXXS- 

ISSSS- 

LXNS3- 


e- 

E- 

E 

SS5 

E 

E 

CNN S E 


KNNNNNNEE 


kXXSN-S-" 


a ® -t n n 


t — i — r~ 
o 


— i — i — r 

• • 




O 4 « M r o 


Figure 6. Number of shrub species less than lm high and herb species recorded in permanent quadrats 1 and 2 from August, 1980 to October, 1982. 


QUADRAT 3 QUADRAT 4 

SHRUBS UTSS THAW ONE METRE HIGH SHRUBS LESS THAN ONE METRE HIGH 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


kXWXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 

- o 

kXXXXX- 

iwwwwwwwww, 

-in 

kXXXXX- 

IXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 

- < 

kXXXXX- 

IXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 

- ■* 

kXXXXXXXX- 

kXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 

- “» 

ixxxxxxx- 

IXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 

-3 

kXXXXXXXX 

ixxxxxxxxxxxxxx 

- < 

kXXXXXXXX- 

1XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 

- 3 

ixxxxxxx- 

IXXXXXXXXXXXWWXXX 

- L. 

kXXXXX- 

k\W.V\.\\\ 

" “* T+ 

kXXXXX- 

KXXXXXXXXXXXX 

y. 

ixxxxxxx- 

kXXXXXXXXXXXWXX 

- z I— B 

XXXXXXXXXX- 

kXXXXXXXXXXXX 

-o < a 

kXXXXXXXX- 

kXXXXXXXXXXXX 

-« oc Jj 

XXXXXXXXXX- 

XXXXXXXXXX 

- < Q m 

E- 

LXXXXXXXXXXX 

- ~J ^ u 

E- 

LXXXXXXXXXXX 

3 1 

kXXXXX- 

IXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 

-2 O 

kXXXXX - 

XXXXXXXXXX 

- < 

ixxxXxxX- 

XXXXXXXXXX 

- 5 

ixxxxxxx- 

LXXXXXXXXXXX 

-n. 

txxxx- 

LXXXXXXXXXXX 

- “> 

XXXXXXXXXX- 

KXXXXXXXXXXXX 

-o 

XXXXXXXXXX- 

KXXXXXXXXXXXX 

i- z 

LXXXXXXXXXXX- 

XXXXXXXXXX 

|- ° 

LXXXXXXXXXXX- 

exsee 

-in 

XXXXXXXXXX- 

,,,,,,,,,, fX>V»X,X>X 

- < 

- , 


Br''0o*K)Nr-oakOr'«>« , )'*K)C'4r-o 




kWVAWWWT 


kXXXXXXXXXXXX- 


kXXXXXXX\XXXXXXX-< 


tXXXXXXXXXWXXX 




kXXXXXXXXXXXX- 


L XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXVVk 


LXs\.\\\\\\\\\\\\XX\\\\ - u. 


kXXXXX - 


XXXXXXXXXN 


IXWXWXWN 


l^kkVWVWWW 


IXXXXXXXkXXXXXX 


xxxxxxxxxx -< 


1XXXXXXX- 


EV\\N- 


KXXXXXXX 


kXXwwxx 


kXXXXX 


LXXXX-*- 


LXXXS- 


kXXXXXXXV - q 


cxxxxxxxxxxx 


iX ^kWW 


IXXXXXXX 


—i — i — r 

W r- 




oaaHen*nN--o 


TO 

h- y 

< 

O' 

a „ 

<f £ 
u 

3 r 
O 


~t — i — i — i — i — r- 

« H 10 *1 * n N 


IXXXXXXXr o 
XXXXXXX -m 
I X XX X XXX • < 
k\\\\\\V - H 
K\\\W - -» 
kXXxWXXX - s 
XXXXXXXXXX - < 
KXXXXX- 3 
NSX - E. 
kXX XXX --> 
IXXXXXXX -o 
KSXXSSS-z 
kXXXXXXX\ -o 
EXSSXXSXXSXSSXS - « 

LXXXXXXXXXXX - < 

sswv- 

NXN - ■> 
KXXXXX-* 
kXXXXX - < 
kSSSSS-j 
kXXXX X • u. 
kXXXXX - -» 
IXXXXXXX -o 
iXXXXXXX ■ z 
[VAxwwwV o 
kXXXXXXXXXXXX * 


O 9 « fx 


<Q ♦ N *- O 


67 


Figure 7- Number of shrub species less than lm high and herb species recorded in permanent quadrats 3 and 4 from August, 1980 to October, 1982. 


68 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


One exception was Lobelia heterophylla which would germinate and flower between 
September and December each year. Another exception was Zygophyllum fruticulosum 
which would quickly appear following uniform light rain, and was often the only herb 
species present, in the quadrats during dry summer periods. 

The lower than normal number of herb species in the 1982 winter period was probably 
due to the exceptionally dry weather. July had no rain at all and all other months had 
rainfall below the monthly average (Table 1). The minimum water requirement for the 
germination of many of the winter annuals did not seem to have been reached. 

A comparison of species similarity between quadrats is included in Tables 3, 4 and 5. 
The highest similarity in both the small shrub and herb categories occurred between 
Quadrats 3 and 4 which had about 70% similarity in both these categories. This is to be 
expected as the quadrats were very close to one another geographically and shared simi- 
lar soils. These quadrats, however, show a low similarity with respect to large shrubs be- 
cause of a recent fire at the site of Quadrat 4. 

Over one third of all small shrub species (8) occurred in all four quadrats at some stage 
during the study, although very few of these became established (Table 4). These shrubs 
largely accounted for the 50% similarity obtained between all quadrats in this vegetation 
category with the exception of Quadrats 3 and 4. The similarity indices for the large 
shrub category, with the exception of Quadrats 2 and 3 which also had around 50% simi- 
lar, tended to be lower than for the small shrub category. 

The herb category exhibited the greatest variation in similarity indices, with geo- 
graphical separation apparently playing a major role. Quadrats 3 and 4 were adjacent 
and had a similarity index of 69.6% whilst the widely separated Quadrats 1 and 2 were 
only 26.3% similar 

A large number of species in all vegetation categories were present in Quadrat 2 but 
were not found in any other quadrat. This is possibly a function of the alkaline, white 
sandy soils in Quadrat 2 which were of more recent origin than the reddish neutral soils 
of Quadrats 1, 3 and 4 on the Quobba Ridge. 

In general undisturbed Acacia shrublands are stable areas and only slightly suscep- 
tible to erosion. Once this type of vegetation is degraded it is slow to recover, and serious 
erosion can occur (Condon 1972). Very little regeneration has occurred in western New 
South Wales where large areas of mulga (Acacia aneura) have died due to overgrazing, 
coupled with tree lopping during drought. 

This study demonstrated that the Lake MacLeod shrublands regenerate very slowly 
if degraded by fire. This is due to the inherently slow growth rates of the shrub species. 
There was no evidence of overgrazing in the study areas but recovery rates are likely to 
be slow if this should occur. 


References 

Condon. R. W. (1972). Soil erosion in the dry land Australia. In: “The uses of trees and shrubs in the dry coun- 
try of Australia". Australia Government Publishing Services, Canberra. 

Green, J. W. (1985). “Census of the vascular plants of Western Australia”, 2nd edition. Western Australian 
Herbarium. Department of Agriculture. Perth. 

Mott, J. ,J. (1972). Germination studies on some annual species from an arid region of Western Australia. 
Journal of Ecology 60: 293-304. 

Prescott, J. A. (1952). “The soils of Australia in relation to vegetation and climate”, 2nd edition. C.S.I.R.O. 
Bulletin No. 52. 


J.P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


69 


Appendix 1. Tentative list of plant species 

* denotes introduced species 


Aizoaceae 

* Carpobrotus aequilaterus (Haw.) N.E.Br. 

* Mesembryanthemum crystallinum L. 

Amaranthaeeae 

Alternanthera sp. 

Amaranthus palliditlorus F. Muell. 

Ptilotus alexandri Beni 
Ptilotus exaltatus Nees 
Ptilotus obovatus (Gaudich.) F. Muell. 

Ptilotus spathulatus (R.Br.) Poiret 
Ptilotus villosiflorus F. Muell. 

Ptilotus sp. 1 (J.P.T. 133 Dampier) 

Ptilotus sp. 2 (J.P.T. 134 Dampier) 

Anthericaceae 

Dichopogon tyleri N.H. Brittan 
Murchisonia volubilus N.H. Brittan 
Thysanotus speckii N.H. Brittan 

Apiaceae 

Daucus glochidiatus (Labill.) Fisher, C. Meyer & Ave-Lall. 
Trachymene pilosa Smith 

Asclepiadacae 

Sarcostemma australe R.Br. 


Asphodelaceae 

*Asphodelus fistulosus L. 


Asteraceae 

Angianthus cunninghamii (DC.) Benth. 

*Aster subulatus Michaux 

Asteiidea aff. athrixioides (Sonder & F. Muell.) G. Kroner 
Brachycome iberidifolia Benth. 

Brachycome latisquamea F. Muell. 

Brachycome sp. (J.P.T. 240, 245 Dampier) 

Calocephalus angiantlwides (Steetz) Benth. 

Calocephalus brownii (Cass.) F. Muell. 

Calotis aff. multicaulis (Turcz.) Druce 
Cephalipterum drummondii A. Gray 
Chthonocephalus pseudevax Steetz 
Craspedia sp. (J.P.T. 277 Dampier) 

Gnephosis brevi folia (A. Gray) Benth. 

Gnephosis gynotticha Diels 
Helipterum corymbosum (A. Gray) Benth. 

Helipterum humboldtianum (Gaudich.) DC. 

Helipterum hyalospermum F. Muell. ex Benth. 

Helipterum involucratum (F. Muell.) Benth. 

Helipterum slrictum (Bindley) Benth. 

Helipterum splendidum Hemsley 
Helipterum sp. (J.P.T. 263 Danipier) 

Lagenifera huegelii Benth. 

Millotia myosutidifolia (Benth.) Steetz 
Olearia axillaris (DC.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 

Olearia imbricata (Turcz.) Benth. 

Olearia sp (J.P.T. 219 Dampier) 

Pluchea squarrosa Benth. 

Podolepis auriculata DC. 

Podolepis canescens Cunn. ex DC. 

Podolepis gardneri G. Davis 
Podolepis lessvnii (Cass.) Benth. 

Podolepis sp. (J.P.T. 87 Dampier) 

Podothcca angustifolia (Labill.) Less. 

Podotheca pygmaea A. Gray 

Schoenia cassiniana (Gaudich) Steetz 

Senecio glossanthus (Sonder) Belcher 

Senecio lautus G. Forster ex Willd. subsp. maritimus Ali 

Senecio lautus G. Forster ex Willd. subsp. dissectifolius Ali 


70 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Sonchus oleraceus L. 

Streptoglossa liatroides (Turcz.) C.R. Dunlop 
Waitzia acuminata Steetz 
Waitzia sp. 1 (J.P.T. 130 Dampier) 

Waitzia sp. 2 (J.P.T. 297 Dampier) 

Avicenniaceae 

Avicennia marina (Porsskal) Vierh. 

Boraginaceae 

Halgania preissiana Lehm. 

Heliotropium paniculatum R.Br. 

Heliotropium undulatum M. Vahl 
Trichodesma zeylanicum (Burm. f.) R.Br. 

Brassicaceae 

* Diplotaxis tenuifolia (L.) DC. 

Lepidium aff. rotundum (Desv.) DC. 

* Sisymbrium irio L. 

Sisymbrium sp. (J.P.T. 54, 55 Dampier) 

Caesalpiniaceae 

Cassia oligophylla F. Muell. 

Cassia sturtii R.Br. 

Labichea eremaea C. Gardner 

Campanulaceae 

Wahlenbergia gracilis A. DC. 

Capparaceae 

Capparis spinosa L. 

Caryophvllaceae 

* Spergularia rubra (L.) J.S. Presl & C. Presl 

Chenopodiaceae 

Atriplex aff. cinerea Poiret 
Atriplex nummularia Bindley 
Atriplex paludosa R.Br. 

Atriplex spongiosa F. Muell. 

* Cbenopodium ambrosioides L. 

Chenopodium desertorum (J. Black) J. Black 
Didvmanthus roei Endl. 

Dysphania plantaginella F. Muell. 

Einadia nutans (R.Br.) A..J. Scott 
Encbylaena tomentosa R.Br. 

Eriochiton sclerolaenoides (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex A.J. Scott 
Halosarcia halocnemoides (Nees) Paul G. Wilson 
Halosarcia indica subsp. bidens (Nees) Paul G. Wilson 
Halosarcia pruinosa (Paulsen) Paul G. Wilson 
Maireana appressa (J. Black) Paul G. Wilson 
Maireana plan i folia (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson 
Maireana polypterygia (Diels) Paul G. Wilson 
Maireana sclernptera (J. Black) Paul G. Wilson 
Maireana tomentosa Moq. 

Rhagodia baccata (Labill.) Moq. 

Rbagodia crassifolia R.Br. 

Rhagodia lati Iblia (Benth.) Paul G. Wilson 
Salsola kali L. 

Sarcocornia quinqueflora (Bunge ex Ung.-Sternb.) A.J. Scott 
Sclerolaena eurotioides (F. Muell.) A.J. Scott 
Sclerolaena aff. forrestiana (F. Muell.) Domin 
Sclerolaena tridens (F. Muell.) Domin 
Sclerolaena uniflora R.Br. 

Sclerolaena sp. (J.P.T. 334 Dampier) 

Sclerostegia disarticulata Paul G. Wilson 
Suaeda australis (R.Br.) Moq. 

Chloanthaceae 

Pitvrodia loxocarpa (F. Muell.) Druce 
Colchicaceae 

Wurmbea odorata T.D. Macfarlane 


J. P. Tyler. Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


71 


Convolvulaceae 

Porana sericea (Gaudich.) F. Muell. 

Crassulaceae 

Crassula colorata (Nees) Ostenf. 

Cucurbitaceae 

Mukia maderaspatana (L.) M. Roemer 
Cyperaceae 

Cyperus sp. 1 (J.P.T. 21 Dampier) 

Cyperus sp. 2 (J.P.T. 22 Dampier) 

Cyperus sp. 3 (J.P.T. 123 Dampier) 

Cyperus sp. 4 (J.P.T. 106 Dampier) 

Dasypogonaceae 

Acanthocarpus preissii Lehm. 

Euphorbiaceae 

Adriana tomentosa Gaudich 
Euphorbia atoto G. Forster 
Euphorbia drummondii Boiss. 

Phyllanthus sp. 1 (J.P.T. 199 Dampier) 

Phyllanthus sp. 2 (J.P.T. 317 Dampier) 

Frankeniaceae 

Frankenia ambita Ostenf. 

Frankenia pauciflora DC. 

Gentianaceae 

* Centaurium spicatum (L.) Fritsch ex Janchen 

* Centaurium tenuiflorum (Hoffsgg. & Link) Fritsch ex Janchen 

Geraniaceae 

Erodium cygnorum Nees 

Goodeniaceae 

Dampiera incana R.Br. 

Goodenia berardiana (Gaudich.) Carolin 
Scaevola aff. collaris F. Muell. 

Scaevola crassifulia Labill. 

Scaevola glandulifera DC. 

Scaevola restiacea Benth. 

Scaevola spinescens R.Br. 

Scaevola tomentosa Gaudich. 

Scaevola sp. (J.P.T. 235 Dampier) 

Gyrostemonaceae 

Codonocarpus cotinifolius (Desf.) F. Muell. 

Gyrostemon sp. (J.P.T. 222 Dampier) 

Juncaginaceae 

Triglochin calcitrapa Flook. 

Lauraceae 

Cassytha aurea J.Z. Weber 
Lobeliaceae 

Lobelia heterophylla Labill. 

L.oranthaceae 

Amyema sp. (J.P.T. 157 Dampier) 

Lysiana exocarpi (Behr) Tieghem 

Malvaceae 

Abutilon geranioides (DC.) Benth. 

Abutilon leucopetalum (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth. 
Gossypium australe F. Muell. 

Hibiscus drummondii Turcz. 

Hibiscus sturtii Flook. 

Lawrencia densiflora (E.G. Baker) Melville 
Lawrencia glomerata Flook. 

Sida intricata F. Muell. 

Sida sp. (J.P.T. 268 Dampier) 


72 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Mimosaceae 

Acacia bivenosa DC. 

Acacia coriacea DC. 

Acacia farnesiana (L.) Willd. 

Acacia gregorii F. Muell. 

Acacia idiomorpha Cunn. ex Benth. 

Acacia ligulata Cunn. ex. Benth. 

Acacia linophylla W. Fitzg. 

- Acacia morrisonii Domin 
Acacia murrayana F. Muell. ex Benth. 

Acacia pvri folia DC. 

Acacia ramulosa W. Fitzg. 

Acacia sclerosperma F. Muell. 

Acacia spathulifolia Maslin 
Acacia tetragonophylla F. Muell. 

Acacia victoriae Benth. 

Acacia xiphophylla E. Pritzel 
Acacia sp. (J.P.T. 340 Dampier) 

+ may be conspecific with A. pvrifolia DC. 

Moraceae 

Ficus platypoda (Miq.) Cunn. ex Miq. 
Myoporaceae 

Eremophila glabra (R.Br.) Ostenf. 

Eremophila mackinlayi F. Muell. 

Eremophila opposit.ifolia R.Br. 

Eremophila subfloccosa Benth. 

Myoporum apiculatum A. DC. 

Myrtaceae 

Calothamnus chrysantherus F, Muell. 

Calytrix brevifolia (Meissner) Benth. 
Eucalyptus camaldulensis Dehnh. 

Eucalyptus coolabah Blakely & Jacobs 
Eucalyptus foecunda Schauer 
Melaleuca cardiophylla F. Muell. 

Melaleuca leucadendra ( L. ) L. 

Pileanthus limacis Labill. 

Thrvptomene baeckeacea F. Muell. 

Najadaceae 

Najas marina L. 

Nyctaginaceae 

Boerhavia sp. (J.P.T. 33 Dampier) 
Commicarpus australis Meikle 

Papaveraceae 

* Argemone ochroleuca Sweet 
Papilionaceae 

Brachysema aphyllum Hook. 

Clianthus formosus (G. Don) Ford & Vick. 
Crotalaria cunninghamii R.Br. 

Daviesia divaricata Benth. 

Glycine clandestina Willd. 

Glycine tabacina (Labill.) Benth. 

Glycyrrhiza acanthocarpa (Lindley) J. Black 
Indigol'era brevidens Benth. 

Indigofera georgei E. Prtizel 
Lotus australis Andrews 
Swainsona kingii F. Muell. 

Phormiaceae 

Dianella revaluta R.Br. 

Plumbaginaceae 

Muellerolimun salicorniaceum (F. Muell.) Lincz. 


Poaceae 

Aristida browniana Henrard 
Aristida contorta F. Muell. 


J. P. Tyler, Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod 


73 


* Avellinia michelii (Savi) Pari. 

* Axonopus sp. (J.P.T. 20 Dampier) 

* Cenchrus ciliaris L. 

* EhrhSeta longiflora Smith 
Enteropogon acicularis (Lindiey) Lazarides 
Eragrostis australasica (Steudel) C.E. Hubb. 
Eragrostis brownii (Kunth) Nees ex Steudel 

* Eragrostis curvula (Schrader) Nees 
Eragrostis eriopoda Benth. 

Eragrostis japonica (Thunb.) Trin. 

Eriachne aff. aristidea F. Muell. 

Eulalia fulva (R.Br.) Kuntze 

* Lolium perenne L. 

Sorghum plumosum P. Beauv. ex Roemer & Schultes 
Stipa elegantissima Labill. 

Themeda australis (R.Br.) Stapf 

* Trachynia sp. (J.P.T. 122 Dampier) 

Triodia basedowii E. Pritzel 
Triodia pungens R.Br. 

Trirapbis sp. (J.P.T. 109 Dampier) 

Polygonaceae 

* Emex australis Steinh. 

Muehlenbeckia sp. 

Polygonum sp. (J.P.T. 13 Dampier) 

Portulacaceae 

Calandrinia granulit’era Benth. 

Calandrinia polyandra Benth. 

Portulaca oleracea L. 

Potamogetonaceae 
Ruppia sp. 

Primulaceae 

Samolus junceus R.Br. 

Proteaceae 

Banksia ashbyi E.G. Baker 
Grevillea eriostachya Lindiey 
Grevillea stenobotrya F. Muell. 

Grevillea wickhamii Meissner. 

Grevillea sp. 

Hakea stenophylla Cunn. ex R.Br. 

Santalaceae 

Exocarpos aphyllus R.Br. 

Santalum acuminatum (R.Br.) A.DC. 

Santalum lanceolatum R.Br. 

Santalum spicatum (R.Br.) A.DC. 

Sapindaceae 

Diplopeitis eriocarpa (Benth.) Hemsley 
Dodonaea amblyophylla Diels 
Dodonaea ptarmicaefolia Turcz. 

Heterodendrum oleaefolium Desf. 

Scrophulariaceae 

Stemodia grossa Benth. 

Stemodia viscosa Roxb. 

Solanaceae 

Anthocercis gracilis Benth. 

Anthocercis littorea Labill. 

Lycium australe F. Muell. 

* Nicotians glauca Graham 

Nicotiana occidentalis Wheeler subsp. occidentalis 
Nicotians si mala ns N. Burb. 

Solanum esuriale Lindiey 

Solanurn lasiophyllum Dunal ex Poiret 

* Solanum nigrum L. 

Solanum orbiculatum Dunal ex Poiret 


54609-6 


74 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Stackhousiaceae 

Stackhousia sp. 1 (J.P.T. 159 Dampier) 
Stackhousia sp. 2 (J.P.T. 203 Dampier) 

Surianaceae 

Stvlobasium spathulatum Desf. 
Thymelaeaceae 

Pimelea ammocharis F. Muell. 

Pimelea microcephala R.Br. 

Tiliaceae 

Corchorus elachocarpus F. Muell. 
Corchorus walcottii F. Muell. 


Tremandraceae 

Tetratheca hirsuta Lindley 


Zygophyllaceae 

Tribuius terrestris L. 
Zygophyllum fruticulosum DC. 
Zygophyllum glaucum F. Muell. 


Kingia 1(1): 75-83 (1987) 


75 


Time between germination and first flowering of some 

perennial plants 


B.G. Muir 

Department of Conservation and Land Management, Murdoch House, 5 The Esplanade, Mt. Pleasant, 
Western Australia 6153. Present address: Dames & Moore, Consulting Engineers, 26 Lyall St., South Perth, 
Western Australia 6151. 


Abstract 

Muir, B. G. Time between germination and first flowering of some perennial plants. Kingia 1(1); 75-83 
(1987). Time elapsed between germination and first flowering is presented for 198 plant species from the 
south-west of Western Australia. About 12% of the species examined required six or more years after germi- 
nation before they first flowered. This has significance for the long term survival of such species in areas where 
the bushland is burnt in regular cycles of five years or less. 


Introduction 

The opinion is held by some land management agencies and a section of the public, 
that vegetation in the south-west of Western Australia should be burned as often as it 
will support fire. The reasoning behind this philosophy is generally that frequent burn- 
ing is necessary to reduce fuel loads to levels which will not allow fierce wildfires to de- 
velop during the hot, dry, summer months. 

The apparent fire tolerance of the vegetation is reflected in its rapid post-fire regener- 
ation, increased flowering in some species following fire, and the lush look of new growth 
compared to the straggly appearance of older bushland. These factors give the layman 
the impression that recently burned bush “looks better”, therefore frequent burning 
must be better for both flora and fauna. My own observations indicate that although 
many plants are fire tolerant they are not necessarily fire dependent. Evidence exists 
which indicates that burning too frequently can permanently alter floristic richness 
(Connell 1978, Westman 1975, Baird 1958). Similarly, physiognomy may be altered 
(Muir 1977, Cochrane 1966, Gill 1975), weed invasion may be exacerbated (Road Verge 
Committee Report 1970, Muir 1977) or fire-sensitive species mav be removed (Wallace 
1966). 

In order for native plant species to persist and to maintain the full potential of their 
gene pool, adequate seed set and plant regeneration must occur between fires. Frequent 
burning may destroy plants before flowering and seed set have occurred. Thus species 
which are obligate seed regenerators and flower within a year or two of being burned may 
be disadvantaged compared, for example, to species growing from rootstocks. Even 
seedstocks stored in the soil may be progressively depleted if seedlings are continually 
being burned before having the opportunity to flower and set further seed. Ultimately 
therefore, species may be lost from certain vegetation types as a consequence of too fre- 
quent burning. 

Studies on vegetation and flora in the Western Australian wheatbelt (Kitchener 1976, 
Muir 1978-79) by the author, and at other localities, generated numerous observations 
on the time between germination and first flowering. It was considered that information 
on the period of time between germination and first flowering would be of assistance in 


76 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


estimating the minimum period necessary to allow successful propagation of some plant 
species. It is also possible that first flowering may be poor, that the seed set in the first 
one or two years of flowering may be sterile, e.g. Dryandra sessilis; or such small num- 
bers of seeds may be set that all succumb to predators. If so, many fire-free years may 
be necessary to ensure the survival of even a single new plant. It should be borne in mind 
that the intervals between germination and first flowering listed in this paper may be 
atypically long or short depending on particular soils and climatic conditions during the 
study period (1975-84). Nonetheless, field observations are considered a fairly reliable 
guide to the time taken from germination to first flowering, at least of some plants. Data 
from cultivation, by contrast, are probably less reliable than field observations, but as 
all records reported here are from one site, the data provide a valid comparison. 


Methods 

Data on the time between germination and first flowering were collected during field 
studies in the Western Australian wheatbelt (Kitchener 1976, Muir 1978-79), and else- 
where in south-western Australia. Other studies and casual observations have been 
made during preparation of publications including Morris and Muir (1975), Muir (1979) 
and Muir (1983). Most field observations were based on studies of vegetation of various 
ages since fire. The presence of flowers or recent fruits on a plant was considered as indi- 
cating potential seed set although, as mentioned above in the case of Dryandra sessilis, 
this may not always be true. The age of the plant since fire was then noted. Care was 



Map 1. Location and areas referred to in Appendix 1. 


B. G. Muir, Time between germination and first flowering 


77 


taken to ensure that all observations were made on plants arising from seed and not 
suckers or rootstocks. Fire age was determined from Local Authority records, infor- 
mation from farmers and from interpretation of aerial photographs. 

Because of the wide range of distribution of some species the approximate geographic 
location of the field observations is presented in Appendix 1 and shown on Map 1. Data 
on time to first flowering in cultivation were recorded from plants grown in the author’s 
garden. All cultivated specimens were grown from freshly collected seed planted at a 
single location at Boya, about 18 km east of Perth on the edge of the Darling Scarp. All 
were planted in sandy loam, loam, clay loam or sandy clay soils in May or June following 
initial germination in sand in pots. Hard seeds of Acacia were abraded with sand paper, 
but all other seeds were untreated. After planting, all were watered twice per week in 
their first summer and once per week in the second. During following years all plants 
were unwatered unless they showed signs of stress. No fertilizers were applied. 

For the purpose of this paper “light” soils are those classed as sand (0-10% clay) to 
sandy clay loam (20-30% clay) and “heavy” soils range from clay loam (30-40% clay) to 
heavy clay (greater than 50% clay) (Northcote 1971). 

Each species record presented in Appendix 1 is based on at least three separate field 
and/or cultivation observations, except those recorded as “wheatbelt” which are based 
on a minimum of five observations. The presence of at least two flowering individuals 
was taken as evidence of possible seed set within any stand of young plants. 


Results and Discussion 

Data collected on 198 species of plants are presented in Appendix 1. Minimum re- 
corded number of years to first flowering and percentage of species which flowered for 
the first time in that year are presented in Table 1. 


Table 1. Minimum recorded number of years to first flowering and percentage of species which 

flowered for the first time in that year. 


Minimum recorded years 
to first flowering 

% of total number 
of species 

1 

1.5 

2 

12.1 

3 

20.7 

4 

34.3 

5 

17.7 

6 

10.6 

7 or more 

2.0 


Although many species flowered within five years of germination, over 12% required 
six or more years before flowering. The presence of even one or two species of this type 
in a stand of vegetation points to a corresponding minimum frequency at which deliber- 
ate control burning can be carried out if species are not to be lost. Any additional con- 
straints such as poor first flowering, sterile seed or excessive seed predation would 
necessitate even longer between-fire intervals to permit the build up of a sufficient seed 
store to permit survival of the species. 

The difference in time to first flowering was compared between those species where 
data were available from both the field and cultivation. These results are presented in 
Table 2. 


78 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Table 2. Source of data, mean time to first flowering in years, the standard deviation (SD) within the 

groups and number (n) of observations. 


Source 

Mean time to 
first flowering (yrs) 

SD 

n 


Field 

4.35 

3.51 

152 


Cultivation 

3.46 

1.15 

178 



Although the means are not significantly different there is a suggestion that most 
plants flower slightly earlier in cultivation. With water supplements over summer, a 
higher rainfall than inland areas of Western Australia, less competition and some pred- 
ator control this is not unexpected, but further research is required. 

Observations on species which were recorded on both light and heavy soil types were 
compared. Where a species was recorded in each soil type in the field, preference was 
given to this data rather than to cultivation data (if it was available). 

Twenty-seven species provided data for flowering in both light and heavy soils. Of 
these 10 species showed no difference in time to first flowering. A further 14 species 
showed that flowering occurred earlier in light soils, while 4 species showed earlier 
flowering on heavy soils. Although no results were statistically different there was some 
suggestion of a trend to earlier flowering in some species on lighter soils, perhaps be- 
cause of easier establishment of root systems. 


References 

Baird, A. M. ( 1958). Notes on the regeneration of vegetation of Garden Island after the 1956 fire. Journal of 
the Royal Society of Western Australia 41: 102-107. 

Cochrane, G. R. (1966). Bushfires and vegetation regeneration. Victorian Naturalist 83: 4-10. 

Connell, J. H. (1978). Diversity in tropical rainforests and coral reefs. Science 199: 1302-1310. 

Gill, A. M. (1975). Fire and the Australian flora: a review. Australian Forestry 38: 1-25. 

Gill, A, M. (1981). Adaptive responses of Australian vascular plant species to fires. Chap. 11. “Fire and the 
Australian biota”. Australian Academy of Sciences Canberra, pp. 243-271. 

Kitchener. D. J. (1976). Preface to the biological survey of the Western Australian wheatbelt. In: Biological 
survey of the Western Australian wheatbelt. Records of the Western Australian Museum Supplement No. 
2: 3-10. 

Morris. K. and Muir, B. G. (1975). Vegetation: In: “A Spring, 1975, biological survey of the proposed Mussel 
Pool Complex and recommendations for its future development”. Western Australian Museum report to 
the Metropolitan Regional Planning Authority. 

Muir, B. G. (1977). Vegetation and habitat of Bendering Reserve. In: “Biological survey of the Western Aus- 
tralian wheatbelt”. pt. 2. Records of the Western Australian Museum Supplement No. 3: 3-142. 

Muir, B. G. (1978-79). “Some nature reserves of the Western Australian wheatbelt". Parts 1-28, Perth: De- 
partment Fisheries and Wildlife Reports. 

Muir. B. G. (1983). Drainage, swamp structure and vegetation succession at Melaleuca Park, northern Swan 
Coastal Plain. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes No. 9: 27-39. 

Northcote, K. H. (1971). “A factual key for the recognition of Australian soils”. C.S.I.R.O./Rellim. 

Road Verge Committee Report (1970). “Conservation of road verges”. W. R. Wallace, Chairman. 

Wallace, W.R. (1966). Fire in the Jarrah forest environment. Journal of the Royal Society of Western Aus- 
tralia 49: 33-44. 

Westman, W. E. (1975). Pattern and diversity in swamp and dune vegetation. North Stradbroke Island. Aus- 
tralian Journal of Botany 23: 339-354. 


B. G. Muir, Time between germination and first flowering 


79 


Appendix 1 . List of species with time to first flowering (in years) as determined from observations 

in the field and under cultivation. 

Soil types are shown as L (light: sand to sandy clay loam) or H (heavy: clay loam to heavy clay). The location 
of the seed source refers to the areas shown on Map 1. 


Species 

Age at flowering 
and substrates 

Field Cultivated 

Source area 

Acacia 

acuminata 

5L5H 

5H 

wheatbelt 

aneura 

4H 

3H 

Mt. Jackson 

assimilis 

6H 


wheatbelt 

blakelyi 


2L 

wheatbelt 

brachyclada 

6L 


wheatbelt 

celastrifolia 


3L 

wheatbelt 

dauiesioides 

4L 

5L 

wheatbelt 

drummondii 

2L 

2L 

Leeuwin-Naturaliste 

ericifolia 

3L 

3L 

wheatbelt, Jurien Bay 

filifolia 

3H 

2L 

wheatbelt 

glaucaptera 

3H 

2L 

Ravensthorpe 

gonophylla 


4L 

wheatbelt 

hemiteles 

3H 

2L 

w'heatbelt 

lasiocalyx 

3L 

3H 

w'heatbelt 

ligustrina 

3L3H 

2L 

wheatbelt 

mackeyana 

5H 


w'heatbelt 

merinthophora 

6L 


wheatbelt 

microbotrya 

4H 

2H 

wheatbelt 

multispicata 

5H 

5L 

wheatbelt 

myrtifolia 

2L 

5L 

wheatbelt 

pentadenia 


5L 

Northcliffe 

pulchella 

2H 

2L 

wheatbelt, Northcliffe 

rostellifera 


3L 

Swan Coastal Plain 

saligna 

3L 

3L 

Sw'an Coastal Plain, wheatbelt, Northcliffe 

signata 

6L 


wheatbelt 

stenoptera 


3L 

wheatbelt 

tetragonophylla 

5H 

4L 

wheatbelt, Kalgoorlie 

truncata 


5L 

wheatbelt 

willdenowiana 


3L 

wheatbelt 

Actinodium 

cunninghamii 


2H 

Stirling Range 

Adenanthos 

meisneri 

3L 

2L 

Darling Scarp 

Agonis 

flexuosa 

5L 

4H 

Leeuwin-Naturaliste 

juniperina 

4L 

2L 

Northcliffe 

marginata 


4L 

Darling Scarp 

Allocasuarina 

acutiualvis 

5L 

4L 

wheatbelt 

campestris 

3H 

4H 

wheatbelt 

corniculata 

4L 


w'heatbelt 

drummondiana 

4L 

5L5H 

Jurien Bay 

fraseriana 

3L 

2L 

Swan Coastal Plain 

huegeliana 

4H 

4H 

w'heatbelt. Darling Scarp 

humilis 

2L3H 

2L 

Darling Scarp, wheatbelt 

microstachya 

4L 

3L 

wheatbelt 

pinaster 

5L 


wheatbelt 

Alyogyne 

hakeifolia 

2L 

2H 

Fitzgerald River National Park 

Anigozanthos 

bicolor 

3H 

2L 

Darling Scarp 

flavidus 


3L 

Albany 

humilis 

2L 

2L 

wheatbelt, Darling Scarp 

manglesii 

2L 

2L 

Swan Coastal Plain 

pulcherrimus 


3L 

wheatbelt, Jurien Bay 

rufus 


3L 

Stirling Range 

viridis 

3L 

2L 

Swan Coastal Plain 


80 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Species 

Age at flowering 
and substrates 

Field Cultivated 

Source area 

Astartea 

ambigua 


3L 

Stirling Range 

fascicularis 

4L6H 

4L 

Darling Scarp, Northcliffe 

heteranthera 

3H 

2L 

wheatbelt 

Baeckea 

camphorosmae 


4L 

Darling Scarp 

muricata 

4H 

4L 

wheatbelt 

Banksia 

ashbyi 


3L 

Fitzgerald River National Park 

attenuate i 

4L 

3L 

Jurien Bay, Swan Coastal Plain 

baueri 

4L 

3L 

wheatbelt. Stirling Range 

baxteri 


4L 

Fitzgerald River National Park 

caleyi 


5L 

Stirling Range 

grandis 

5L 

4L 

Darling Scarp 

media 

5L4H 

3L 

Esperance 

menziesii 

3L 


Swan Coastal Plain 

prionotes 

4L 

4L 

Jurien Bay, wheatbelt 

sceptrum 

4L 

4L 

Geraldton 

sphaerocarpa 

4H 

3H4L 

Jurien Bay, wheatbelt 

Beaufortia 

decussata 


4L 

Stirling Range 

elegans 


4L 

Swan Coastal Plain, Esperance 

heterophylla 


4L 

Kalgoorlie. Ravensthorpe, Stirling Range 

micrantha 

6H 


wheatbelt 

sparsa 

4L 

4L 

Stirling Range. Northcliffe 

Boronia 

alata 


4L 

Stirling Range, Northcliffe 

crenulata 


1L 

Northcliffe, Darling Scarp, Stirling Range 

heterophylla 

4L 

4L 

Northcliffe 

megastigma 

2L 

2L 

Northcliffe 

Bossiaea 

eriocarpa 


4L 

wheatbelt 

Brachvchiton 

gregorii 

8H 

6H 

Mt. Jackson 

Brachysema 

aphyllum 

5H 

4L 

wheatbelt 

celsiana 


4L 

wheatbelt 

daviesioides 

4H 


wheatbelt, Kalgoorlie 

Bursaria 

spinosa 


4L 

wheatbelt 

Callistemon 

phoeniceus 

4H 

4H4L 

wheatbelt 

speciosus 

5L 

5L5H 

Albany 

Calothamnus 

blepharospermus 


4L 

wheatbelt, Geraldton 

chrvsantherus 

4H 

3L4H 

wheatbelt 

gilesii 


4L 

wheatbelt, Kalgoorlie, Mt. Jackson 

gracilis 


4L 

Fitzgerald River National Park 

lateralis 

2L 

2L 

Northcliffe 

longissimus 


5L 

Jurien Bav 

oldfieldii 


4L 

Geraldton 

planifolius 

5L 

3L 

Stirling Range 

quadrifidus 

3L 

4L 

wheatbelt, Darling Scarp 

sanguineus 

3L 

2H3L 

Darling Scarp, Stirling Range 

villosus 


2L 

Swan Coastal Plain, Darling Scarp 


B. G. Muir, Time between germination and first flowering 


81 


Species Age at flowering Source area 

and substrates 
Field Cultivated 


Calytrix 


angulata 


5L 

fraseri 

3L 

3L 

stipulosa 


5L 

Cassia 

nemophila 

5H 

4L 

pleurocarpa 


3L 

Casuarina 

obesa 

5H 

4H 

Chamelaucium 

axillare 


3L 

ciliatum 

5H 

5L 

megalopetalum 

4L 

3L 

uncinatum 

2L 

2H 

Darwinia 

citriodora 

2H 

3L2H 

Dianella 

revoluta 

3L5H 

4L 

Dodonaea 

attenuata 

4H 

2L4H 

inaequifolia 

3H 

3L 

Dryandra 

carduacea 

4H 

4H 

cirsioides 

6L 


fraseri 


3L 

nobilis 

5H 

5H 

polycephala 

4H 

3L 

proteoides 

6H 

5H 

sessilis 

3L2H 

2H 

Eremaea 

beaufortioides 

3L 

3L 

fimbriata 


4L 

pauciflora 

4L 

4L 

violacea 

4L 

4L 

Eremophila 

clarkei 


2L 

decipiens 

2L3H 

1H 

glabra 

4H 

3H 

Eriostemon 

deserti 

6H 


Eucalyptus 

burdettiana 


4L 

caesia 


5H 

calophylla 

2H 

2H 

cylindriflora 

4H 

3H 

erythrocorys 

5H 

7H 

gardneri 

5H 

5H 

loxophleba 

4H 

4H 

macrocarpa 

3L 

3L 

platypus 

4H 

3H 

salmonophloia 

5H 

4H 

tetragona 

3L 

3L 

torquata 

2H 

2H 


Darling Scarp 
Swan Coastal Plain 
wheatbelt 


wheatbelt 

Mt. Jackson, Kalgoorlie 


Swan Coastal Plain 


Esperance 

wheatbelt, Stirling Range 
Fitzgerald River National Park 
Geraldton 


Darling Scarp 


Swan Coastal Plain, Darling Scarp, wheatbelt 


wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 


wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 

wheatbelt. Darling Scarp, Swan Coastal Plain, 
Jurien Bay 

Swan Coastal Plain, Jurien Bay 
Swan Coastal Plain 
wheatbelt, Jurien Bay 
Jurien Bay 


Mt. Jackson, wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 


wheatbelt, Kalgoorlie 


Fitzgerald River National Park 

wheatbelt 

Darling Scarp 

wheatbelt 

Jurien Bay 

wheatbelt 

wheatbelt 

w'heatbelt 

Stirling Range 

wheatbelt, Kalgoorlie 

Fitzgerald River National Park, Esperance 
wheatbelt 


82 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Species 

Age at flowering 
and substrates 

Field Cultivated 

Source area 

Greuillea 

bipinnatifida 

2H 

2H 

wheatbelt 

didymobotrya 

6H 


wheatbelt 

“excelsior” 

4L 

3L 

wheatbelt 

nematophylla 

4L 

3L 

wheatbelt 

paniculata 

4H 

4L 

wheatbelt 

Hakea 

adnata 

5H 

6H 

wheatbelt 

bucculenta 


3L 

Geraldton 

coriacea 

6L 


wheatbelt 

cucullata 


4L 

Albany, Stirling Range 

falcata 

6H 

3L 

wheatbelt 

incrassata 


3L4H 

wheatbelt 

laurina 

3H 

3H 

wheatbelt, Fitzgerald River National Park 

multilineata 

5L 

4L4H 

wheatbelt 

petiolaris 

4L 

3H 

wheatbelt 

platysperma 

5H 

4H 

wheatbelt 

scoparia 

3L 

3L 

wheatbelt 

subsulcata 

6L6H 

4L5H 

wheatbelt 

victoria 

4L 

4L 

Fitzgerald River National Park 

Hypocalymma 

angustifolium 

4L 

5L 

Swan Coastal Plain, Jurien Bay, wheatbelt 

robustum 

4L 

4L 

Jurien Bay, Swan Coastal Plain 

Kunzea 

baxteri 

4H 

4L 

Esperance 

pulchella 

3L 

2L3H 

wheatbelt 

recurva 


4L 

Northcliffe 

vestita 

4L 

4L 

Swan Coastal Plain 

Lechenaultia 

biloba 

2L 

2L 

Darling Scarp 

formosa 

1H 

1L 

wheatbelt 

Lepidosperma 

drummondii 

6L6H 


wheatbelt 

pubisquameum 

6H 


wheatbelt 

Leptospermum 

erubescens 

4L 

4L 

wheatbelt, Darling Scarp 

Melaleuca 

acuminata 

4H 

4L 

wheatbelt 

conothamnoides 


2L 

wheatbelt 

cordata 

6L 


wheatbelt 

cymbifolia 

4H 

4H 

wheatbelt, Kalgoorlie 

diosmifolia 

7L 

6L 

Northcliffe 

elliptica 

5H 

4H 

Fitzgerald River National Park, wheatbelt 

fulgens 

4H 

4H 

wheatbelt 

lanceolata 

3L 

3L 

Leeuwin -Naturaliste 

lateritia 

5H 

4L5H 

Swan Coastal Plain, Leeuwin-Naturaliste 

laxiflora 

6L 

3L 

wheatbelt 

oldfieldii 

4L4H 

3L 

wheatbelt, Geraldton 

pungens 

6L 

4L 

wheatbelt 

radula 

3H 

4L2H 

Jurien Bay. Geraldton, wheatbelt 

scabra 

6L 

5L 

wheatbelt. Fitzgerald River National Park 

subtrigona 

6H 

5L 

wheatbelt, Fitzgerald River National Park 

uncinata 

6L 

4L 

wheatbelt 

Olearia 

axillaris 

4L 

4L 

Leeuwin-Naturaliste, Northcliffe 


B. G. Muir, Time between germination and first flowering 


83 


Species 

Age at flowering 
and substrates 

Field Cultivated 

Source area 

Paraserianthes 

lophantha 

2H 

2L 

Darling Scarp 

Pelargonium 

australe 

1L2H 

1L1H 

Swan Coastal Plain, Jurien Bay 

Petrophile 

ericifolia 

5L 

3L 

wheatbelt 

serruriae 

4H 

3H 

Darling Scarp, wheatbelt 

Phyllanthus 

calycinus 

2H 

2H 

Darling Scarp 

Pimelea 

physodes 

4H 

2L 

Fitzgerald River National Park 

Pittosporum 

phylliraeoides 

7H 

7H 

wheatbelt 

Regelia 

ciliata 

5L 

5L 

Swan Coastal Plain 

megacephala 

3L 

3L 

Jurien Bay 

velutina 

5H 

5L 

Fitzgerald River National Park 

Santalum 

acuminatum 

8H 


wheatbelt 

Templetonia 

retusa 

4L 

3L 

Swan Coastal Plain, Leeuwin-Naturaliste, 

Verticordia 

chrysantha 

6H 

4L 

Northcliffe 

wheatbelt 

multiflora 

3L 

3L 

Stirling Range, Fitzgerald River National 

roei 

5L 

5L 

Park 

Darling Scarp, wheatbelt 

Xanthorrhoea 

nana 

5L6H 


wheatbelt 






Kingia 1(1): 85-133(1987) 


85 


The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of 
Lechenaultia R.Br. (Goodeniaceae) 

David A. Morrison 


John Ray Herbarium, Botany Building (A12), University of Sydney, N.S.W, 2006. Present address: Depart- 
ment of Applied Biology, New South Wales Institute of Technology, P.O. Box 123, Broadway, N.S.W. 2007. 


Abstract 

Morrison, D.A. The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia R.Br. 
(Goodeniaceae). Kingia 1(1): 85-133 (1987). Distribution maps for each of the 25 known species of 
Lechenaultia are presented for 0.5“ lat. x 0.5° long, grid cells, along with discussions of the habitat, flowering 
period, morphology, and conservation status. Nineteen of the species are endemic (or nearly endemic) to 
south-western Western Australia. An isoflor map of this region indicates a high node of species-richness on 
the northern sandplains, with a band of moderate species-richness running south-eastwards to the southern 
sandplains. This species- richness band follows the 400 mm annual rainfall isohyet, and corresponds with the 
kwongan heathlands and the wheatbelt. 

Ordination, cluster and discriminant function analyses of the distribution of these 19 Lechenaultia species 
suggests that there are five biogeographic regions:- one area on the far northern sandplains, one on the 
northern sandplains and northern part of the w'heatbelt, one in the jarrah woodlands and karri forests, one 
on the southern sandplains and southern part of the wheatbelt, and one in the inland mallee area. 
Discriminant function analyses of the distribution of these 19 Lechenaultia species among the 
phytogeographic regions of Beard and Barlow indicate that they are both accurate reflections of the 
Lechenaultia distributions. 

Similarity coefficients of species presence among the phytogeographic regions of Beard indicate that the 
Irwin, Darling and Avon Botanical Districts are more similar to each other than they are to the Eyre and Roe 
Botanical Districts; while cladistic analysis of endemic species indicates that the Irwin, Roe and Eyre Districts 
have a more similar history. This suggests that there has been fairly widespread dispersal of some species in 
recent times. 

Lechenaultia laricina is considered to be an endangered species, with L.juncea.L. longiloba and L. pulvinaris 
vulnerable, and L. acutiloba and L. superba rare; L. chlorantha and L. ovata are too poorly known for the 
conservation status to be known. Only three of these species are confidently known to be represented in 
conservation reserves, with two of the others thought to be present. 


Introduction 

The Goodeniaceae are well-represented in the flora of Western Australia (Marchant 
1973), and they are one of the commonly encountered families in the heathlands of the 
south-west (George et al. 1979, Lament et al. 1984). W T ithin this family, Lechenaultia 
R.Br. is one of the most interesting genera. It is restricted to Aust ralia and New Guinea, 
with all of the 25 recognised species occurring in Australia (Morrison 1986). Nineteen 
of the species are endemic (or nearly endemic) to south-western W T estern Australia, with 
one species on North-West Cape, two species in arid western Central Australia, one in 
arid eastern Central Australia, one restricted to a small area of the Northern Territory, 
and one species widespread across tropical northern Australia and extending to the 
southern coast and off-shore islands of New Guinea. 


86 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Most of the species are small perennial sub-shrubs or herbs, with only Lechenaultia 
acutiloba, L. divaricata and L. linarioides becoming shrubs over 1 m high. The plants are 
widespread but never dominant components of the flora of south-western Western 
Australia, occurring in woodland, forest, and especially heath (George et al. 1979, Specht 
1981, Lamont et al. 1984). 

This paper provides previously unpublished notes on the ecology, morphology, and 
conservation status of all of the species, as well as presenting the distribution data. The 
phytogeography of the South-West Botanical Province of Western Australia is also 
analysed in relation to the distribution and phylogeny of Lechenaultia. 


Methods 

The data presented were obtained from the herbarium collections housed at AD, BRI, 
CANB, CBG, LD, MEL, NT, PERTH and SYD, plus the type collections of CGE and 
S (codes as in Holmgren et al. 1981), supplemented by field observations of some 70% 
of the species (all from south-western Western Australia). The taxonomic scheme used 
was that of Morrison (1986). 

The distribution of each species was recorded on a map of Australia subdivided into 
a 0.5° latitude by 0.5° longitude grid, corresponding to the 1:100,000 topographic survey 
maps of the Division of National Mapping, Commonwealth Department of Natural 
Resources. 

Within the Lechenaultia distribution, only the South-West Botanical Province of 
Western Australia contains enough species for the analysis of phytogeographic patterns 
in detail. Consequently, the phytogeographic analyses concentrated on this area. 

Two species-richness (isoflor) maps of the South-West Botanical province were 
derived from the distribution data. The first presented the species distribution based 
solely on validated herbarium records. However, as this is presumably an incomplete 
record, due to sparse collecting in some areas and land clearance in others, a second map 
presented the distributions as they could be conservatively inferred from the recorded 
distribution. For most species, this second map differed from the first only in one or two 
grid cells; and this second map was assumed to be superior to the first as a true 
represent ation of the species’ distributions. It was therefore these inferred distributions 
that were used in the phytogeographic analyses. 

The pattern of variation among the distributions of the 19 Lechenaultia species 
present in the South-West Botanical Province was analysed simultaneously using an 
ordination technique, detrended correspondence analysis (Hill 1979a), on the presence 
or absence of the species in each of those 130 grid cells that occur in the South-West 
Botanical Province. This non-linear technique is reported to be superior to the 
traditional linear ordinations (Gauch et al. 1977, Hill and Gauch 1980, Gauch et al. 
1981), and this appears to be true for the data sets for which I have made comparisons. 
The pattern of variation among the 130 grid cells was analysed by ordinating the 
presence or absence of each of the 19 Lechenaultia species in each cell. 

The clust ering pattern of the 130 grid cells was investigated using a clustering strategy, 
two-way indicator species analysis (Hill 1979b), on the presence or absence of the 19 
Lechenaultia species in each grid cell. This polythetic divisive technique is reported to 
be superior to traditional agglomerative techniques (Gauch and Whittaker 1981), and 
this appears to be also true for the data sets that I have used. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 87 

The predictability of the phytogeographic clusters formed by this analysis was tested 
using discriminant function analysis (Klecka 1975). This technique derives a small 
number of linear functions that weight the original discriminating variables (in this 
case, presence or absence of each of the 19 Lechenaultia species) so as to maximise the 
separation of the total scores of a set of reference samples summed over all of the 
variables. In this case, the reference samples consisted of each of the 0.5° x 0.5° grid cells 
that make up a particular phytogeographic cluster. Each of the grid cells was then 
individually re-classified using the discriminant functions derived from the original 
analysis, to see if the they were correctly classified into the particular phytogeographic 
region to which they were originally assigned. This technique effectively weights the 
species by constancy within groups (ie. minimal within-group variance and maximal 
between-group variance), and this approach to assessing classifications has been 
suggested by several people (Farris 1966, Johnson 1982). 


The relationships between the Lechenaultia species distributions and the 
phytogeographic regions of Beard (1980d) and Barlow (1985) that cover the South-West 
Botanical Province (see Figures 6a and 6b) were also analysed using discriminant 
function analysis. For the Barlow (1985) regions, assigning each of the 131 grid cells to 
a particular region was straightforward, as this system is based on a 1° x 1° grid; while 
for the Beard (1980d) regions, which are based on vegetation physiognomy, those grid 
cells near the boundaries of the regions were assigned to the region that occupied the 
greatest portion of the cell. Once again, each of the grid cells was then individually 
re-classified using the discriminant functions to see if the they were correctly classified 
into the particular phytogeographic region to which they were originally assigned. A 
comparison was also made between the original Barlow (1984) regions and the modified 
regions of Barlow (1985), to see if there was any significant improvement in the 
predictivity of the modified regions compared to the original. 


The relationships among the five south-western phytogeographic regions of Beard 
(1980d), as related to Lechenaultia, were analysed in two ways. Firstly, the overall 
superficial similarity was assessed using two similarity indices:- the Jaccard Coefficient 
and the Simple Matching Coefficient (Hubalek 1982). 


Secondly, the historical relationships among the regions were analysed by converting 
the Lechenaultia morphological cladogram of Morrison (1987) into an area cladogram. 
This was done by simply superimposing the phytogeographic regions of Beard (1980d) 
onto the cladogram (cf. Nelson and Platnick 1981). Unfortunately, the cladogram as it 
stands (Figure 7a) is uninformative (or falsely informative; Platnick 1981) as far as the 
phytogeographic regions are concerned, because too many of the species occur in several 
of the regions. Therefore, the area cladogram was reduced to only those 11 species that 
are endemic to one of the phytogeographic regions plus those 3 species that are more 
characteristic of only one region (Figure 7b). While this potentially results in the loss of 
information (Platnick 1981), it does allow the cladogram to be resolved to a simple 
informative fwe-area cladogram. Those species excluded from the analysis were L. 
biloba, L. floribunda, L. formosa, L. macrantha and L. tubiflora, which are all widespread 
generalist species, while L. acutiloba was considered typical of the Eyre region and L. 
linarioides and L. stenosepala typical of the Irwin region. 


The predominant geographical modes of speciation shown by Lechenaultia in 
Australia were investigated by studying the distributions of pairs or groups of closely 
related species, as defined by the taxonomic system of Morrison (1986). 


88 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Results and Discussion 

The distribution maps, and the notes on morphology, ecology, and conservation status 
are presented in Appendix 1. The species present or presumed to be present in each of 
the 0.5° x 0.5° grid cells of south-western Western Australia are listed in Appendix 2. 

Most of the south-western species occur in shrubland of some sort, although several 
species also occur in woodland or mallee. Only L. biloba is known from forests. The 
inland species usually occur in open grassland or woodland. All of the species occur in 
freely-draining sand or lateritic gravelly soils, except for L. expansa, which occurs in 
permanently wet areas. All of the species apparently have woody rootstocks, some of 
which can spread laterally. This may allow them to regenerate vegetatively after a fire 
or a dry spell. 

The main flowering period for the genus is October and November, as shown in Figure 
1. However, many of the species flower sporadically throughout the year, perhaps only 
after rain or a fire. 



Figure 1. Number of Lechenaultia species flowering per week in south- western Western Australia. Data from 
Appendix 1. 

Table 1 summarises the conservation status for those species considered to be at risk. 
Six of the species (24%) are thought to be under threat, all of them from the South-West 
Botanical Province of Western Australia. A further two species are too poorly known for 
their conservation status to be accurately determined. Three of the species are thought 
not to occur in conservation reserves, while two others have not been recently confirmed 
as present in them. Rye et al. (1980) and Burgman and Hopper (1982) report only two 
of these species to be exploited in the wild by the wildflower industry, although 32% of 
the total number of Lechenaultia species are exploited. Nearly all of this exploitation is 
for the nursery trade. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


89 


Table 1. Summary of the conservation data for the Lechenaultia species considered to be at risk. 


Conservation Category * 

Leigh et al. (1981) + 

This study -f 

Extinct (X) 





Endangered (E) 

L. longiloba (C) 

L. pulvinaris 

L. laricina 

Vulnerable (V) 

L. juncea 

L. juncea 

L. longiloba (C?) 

L. pulvinaris (C) 

Rare (R) 

L. acutiloba (C) 

L. superba (C) 

L. chlorantha (C) 

L. acutiloba (C) 

L. superba (C) 

Poorly Known (K) 

— 

L. chlorantha (C?) 

L. ovata 


* See Leigh et al. (1981) for a detailed explanation 

+ C - species known from conservation reserves. ? - not recently confirmed to be present 


The two maps of the species-richness isopleths are shown in Figures 2a and 2b. The 
isoflor map of Figure 2b indicates a high node of species richness on the northern 
sandplains, with over 44% of the species occurring in a grid cell south-east of Eneabba. 
This is in accord with the comments of George et al. (1979), who consider Lechenaultia 
to be characteristic species of the floristically rich heathland between the Moore River 
and Dongara. A band of moderate species-richness then runs south-east through the 
wheatbelt, and then extends eastward along the southern sandplains past Esperance. 
The kwongan heathlands predominate on both the northern and southern sandplains of 
this species-rich area, with eucalypt and banksia woodlands occupying the intermediate 
wheatbelt. The Jarrah, Marri and Karri forests of the extreme south-west are relatively 
species-poor, as are the woodlands and shrublands of the inland area. 

This band of species richness roughly follows the 400 mm annual rainfall isohyet, with 
the 800 mm isohyet defining the transition to the species-poor area of the south-western 
forests and the 300 mm isohyet defining the eastern limit of Lechenaultia distribution. 
This distribution appears to be a recurrent pattern at the generic level in the flora of 
south-western Australia, with many examples appearing in a wide range of families (eg. 
Haemodoraceae, Proteaceae, Rutaceae, Mimosaceae, Myrtaceae; see Hopper 1979, 
Lamont et al. 1984). This has resulted in the recognition of three species-richness zones 
in south-western Australia:- one in the Eneabba-Mt Lesueur area, one in the Stirling 
Ranges, and one near the Fitzgerald River (George et al. 1979). it is therefore interesting 
to note that Lechenaultia does not appear to have the expected node in the Stirling 
Ranges. 

One of the apparent reasons for the high species richness in the kwongan heathlands 
is the high number of localised endemics compared to the wheatbelt and the 
species-poor areas. There are three extremely localised endemics (L. chlorantha, L. 
juncea and L. longiloba) in the northern kwongan and another three in the southern 
kwongan (L. acutiloba , L. heteromera and L. superba), while the wheatbelt only has two 
localised endemics (L. laricina and L. pulvinaris ) and the other areas none. 

A comparison of Figures 2a and 2b highlights several apparently sparsely collected 
areas in the South-West Botanical Province. The only species with any large remaining 
disjunctions in its distribution is L. formosa (Morrison 1986); the other gaps in the 
species distributions are therefore presumably the result of under-collection or the 
destruction of populations due to agricultural clearance. The most obvious 
under-collected area is the eastern half of the Roe Botanical District, This is an area of 
mallee that has only recently become easily accessible to botanical collectors, and it 


54609-7 


90 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 




from Appendix 2. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


91 


I 

• brevifolia 


0 papillata 


^heteromera 
• superba 


^acutiloba 


formosa 

• 

pulvinaris 

• 

tubif lora 

• 

• 

laricina 

expansa 

• 

• biloba 


stenosepala 

• 

0 • floribunda 


juncea 

• linarioides 


• hirsuta 


n 


• chlorantha 
macrantha 0 

• longiloba 


Figure 3. Projection of the Lechenaultia species onto axes representing the first two components from the 
detrended correspondence analysis of the distribution data. The eigenvalues associated with these 
two components were 0.786 and 0.360 respectively. 


92 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 



Figure 4. Projection of the 0.5° x 0.5° grid cells onto axes representing the first two components from the 
detrended correspondence analysis of the distribution data. The eigenvalues associated with these 
two components were 0.786 and 0.360 respectively. The five phytogeographic groups from the clus- 
ter analysis are also shown. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


93 


appears to be an area relatively rich in uncollected species. For example, the two newly 
described Lechenaultia species from south-western Australia are from this area 
(Morrison 1986). The other apparently poorly collected area is the northern tip of the 
Irwin Botanical District and the Shark Bay area, another area that has received only 
relatively recent botanical inspection. The area between Collie and Mt Barker in the 
south-west also shows gaps in many of the species distributions, but this is more likely 
to be a result of clearing for agriculture. 

The ordination of the species distributions (Figure 3) indicates three main groupings 
of species. Those species that are restricted to the Roe and Eyre Botanical Districts (L. 
acutiloba, L. brevifolia. L. heteromera, L. papillata, and L. superba) ordinate together, 
as do most of those species common in the northern kwongan (L. biloba, L. chlorantha , 
L. floribunda. L. hirsuta. L. juncea, L. linarioides, L. longiloba, L. macrantha and L. 
stenosepala). The two endemics of the Avon District ( L . laricina and L. pulvinaris ) form 
the third group. The sole endemic of the south-western forests (L. expansa) and the two 
widespread species (L. formosa and L. tubi flora) do not fit into any of the groups. 

The first axis of this ordination accurately separates the north-western species from 
the south-eastern ones, while the second axis appears to reflect the rainfall gradient 
away from the coast. The distribution of the individual species thus also appears to be 
strongly influenced by rainfall, as well as the generic distribution. 

The ordination of the grid cells (Figure 4 ) does not reveal any obvious clusters, indicat- 
ing that there are no clear-cut groupings of regions within the South-West Botanical 
Province as far as Lechenaultia is concerned. Once again, the first axis separates those 
grid cells in the north-west from those in the south-east, while the second axis separates 
the coastal grid cells from the inland ones. 

The clustering analysis reveals five main groupings of the grid cells (Figures 5a and 5b); 
and the re-classification of the grid cells in the discriminant function analysis of the 
clusters indicates that only 3.1% of the grid cells were incorrectly classified. This 
suggests that the cluster pattern has a high level of predictability. However, while the 
projection of these clusters onto the ordination (Figure 4) shows that they are non- over- 
lapping, they are nonetheless somewhat arbitrary clusters in a continuum of variation. 

These grid cell clusters correspond fairly closely to the biogeographic areas tradition- 
ally recognised in south-western Western Australia:- Groups 1 and 2 occur in the 
kwongan of the northern sandplains, with Group 2 extending into the northern part of 
the wheatbelt, Group 3 occurs in the kwongan of the southern sandplains and extends 
into the southern part of the wheatbelt. Group 4 occurs in the jarrah and marri 
woodlands and karri forests of the south-west, and Group 5 occurs in the inland mallee 
area. However, the cluster analysis fails to unite the wheatbelt as a single unit, and the 
northern sandplains are clearly divided into two areas. This latter pattern seems to be 
the result of a large number of localised endemics that are restricted to only one of these 
two areas. Finally, the analysis also suggests that the southern areas are more similar to 
each other than they are to the northern areas (Figure 5a). 

The results of the re-classification of the grid cells in the discriminant function analy- 
ses (Tables 2 and 3) indicate that the phytogeographic regions of both Beard (1980d) 
and Barlow (1985) are reasonably accurate reflections of the distribution of the 
Lechenaultia species. The discriminant functions correctly re-classihed approximately 
85% of the grid cells in both cases (87.0% for the Beard regions and 83.2% for the Barlow 
regions), and those grid cells incorrectly re-classified were usually around the bound- 
aries of the regions (Figures 6a and 6b). 


94 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 




1 igure 5. Dendrogram (Figure 5a) and map (Figure 5b) of the five phytogeographic groups resulting from the 
clustering analyses of the distribution data. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


95 


Table 2. Results of the re-classification of the grid cells of the Beard (1980d) phytogeographic 
regions using discriminant function analysis. 


Phytogeographic region 


Phytogeographic region 

of Beard 


Total no. 

predicted from the 






of grid 

discriminant function 

Irwin 

Avon 

Darling 

Roe 

Eyre 

cells 

Irwin 

18 

1 

0 

0 

0 

19 

Avon 

1 

24 

5 

7 

0 

37 

Darling 

0 

1 

32 

0 

0 

33 

Roe 

0 

0 

0 

22 

0 

22 

Eyre 

0 

1 

1 

0 

15 

17 

Table 3. Results of the 

re-classification of 

the grid cells 

of the 

Barlow (1984) 

and (1985) 

phytogeographic regions using discriminant function analysis. 



Phytogeographic region Phytogeographic region of Barlow Total no. 

predicted from the of grid 

discriminant function Bencubbin Leeuwin Esperance cells 


Barlow (1984) 

Bencubbin 

28 

7 

3 

38 

Leeuwin 

2 

32 

2 

36 

Esperance 

5 

2 

50 

57 

Barlow (1985) 

Bencubbin 

38 

7 

6 

51 

Leeu//in 

3 

32 

2 

37 

Esperance 

2 

2 

39 

43 


For the Beard (1980d) regions, most of the incorrectly re-classified grid cells were in 
the complex boundary area of the Avon, Darling, Eyre and Roe Botanical Districts to 
the north of the Stirling Ranges (Figure 6a). In particular, the analysis indicates that 
most of this area should be correctly classified as part of the Avon Botanical District. 
However, such a result is not unexpected, as the regions were originally based on veg- 
etation physiognomy rather than floristies (Beard 1980d), and there is thus no a priori 
reason to assume that they should accurately reflect the distribution of any one particu- 
lar genus. 


On the other hand, the incorrectly re-classified grid cells for the analysis of the Barlow 
(1985) regions are around the boundaries of most of the regions (Figure 6b). In particu- 
lar, the analysis indicates that most of the boundaries are displaced by 0.5° of latitude 
or longitude. This is in fact a very suggestive result, as the regions were originally based 
on a 1° grid, and the analysis thus indicates that the regional boundaries are actually 
correctly placed at this scale. The Barlow (1985) regions appear to be slightly less predic- 
tive than the original Barlow ( 1984) regions, as the original regions were 84.4% correctly 
re-classified by the discriminant function analysis (Table 3). 

The similarity coefficients among the phytogeographic regions of Beard (1980d) 
(Table 4) indicate that the Irwin, Avon and Darling Botanical Districts are superficially 
very similar, as are the Roe and Eyre Botanical Districts. On the other hand, the reduced 
area cladogram (Figure 7c) indicates that the Irwin Botanical District has a more similar 
history to that of the Roe and Eyre Botanical Districts. The history thus unites the 
northern and southern kwongan areas, even though they are now spacially separated. 

Such a relationship has been noted for other genera as well, based on the distribution 
of vicarious species pairs and disjunctions in the distributions of species (see Nelson 
1981, Lamont et al. 1984). The current disjunction between the kwongan vegetation 
areas has been post ulated to be the result of disruption of a previously continuous range, 


96 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 



Figure 6. The South-West Botanical Province phytogeographic regions of Beard (1980d) (Figure 6a) and 
Barlow (1985) (Figure 6b). showing those grid cells incorrectly re-classified by the discriminant 
functions. 


D.A. Morrison. The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultici. 


97 


a 


Avon, Eyre, Irwin, Roe 

f ormosa 

Irwin 

chlorantha 

Darling, Irwin 

linarioides 

Eyre 

superba 

Eyre, Roe 

ac utiloba 

Avon, Darling, Eyre, Irwin 

t u b if 1 o r a 

Irwin 

1 o n g i 1 o b a 

Avon, Irwin 

mac r a ntha 

Irwin 

h i r s u t a 

Avon 

laricina 

Roe 

p a p i 1 1 a t a 

Avon, Darling, Irwin 

f loribunda 

Avon 

p u 1 v ina r i s 

Darling 

e xpansa 

Avon, Darling, Irwin, Roe 

b i 1 o b a 

Darling, Irwin 

stenosepala 

* 

f ilif ormi s 

* 

o vata 

Irwin 

juncea 

Roe 

bre vif olia 

* 

striata 

Eyre 

heteromera 

* 

lutescens 

* 

d i va rica ta 

* 

subcymosa 




c 


Irwin 

Roe 

Eyre 

Avon 

Darling 



Figure 7. Area cladogram of all of the Lechenaultia species (Figure 7a), those Lechenaultia species that are 
endemic to only one Botanical District of the South-West Botanical Province (Figure 7b) and the 
reduced area cladogram from Figure 7b (Figure 7c), showing the Botanical Districts of the South- 
West Botanical Province, in which they occur. * Not in South-West Botanical Province. 


98 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Table 4 . Percentage similarity of the phytogeographic regions of Beard (1980d). The upper half of 
the similarity matrix contains the Simple Matching Coefficient while the lower half contains the 

Jaccard Coefficient. 


Phytogeographic Region 

Irwin 

Phytogeographic region 

Avon Darling Roe 

Eyre 

Irwin 


57.9 

63.2 

36.8 

36.8 

Avon 

38.5 

— 

63.2 

57.9 

57.9 

Darling 

50.0 

27.3 

— 

52.6 

52.6 

Roe 

14.3 

20.0 

20.0 

— 

68.4 

Eyre 

14.3 

20.0 

20.0 

25.0 



this continuous range itself being the result of colonisat ion of the whole area by laterite- 
tolerant species after the area was subjected to lateritisation during the Miocene 
(Marchant 1973, Lamont et al. 1984). The cause of the disjunction is postulated to be 
the onset of more arid conditions during the Holocene (Nelson 1981, Hopkins et al. 
1983. Lamont et al. 1984). The expansion of the drier regimes would have resulted in the 
extinction of the kwongan species, leaving the upland areas as refugia and subsequent 
centres of speciation. The current superficial floristic similarity of the northern 
kwongan with the forests of the south-west and the woodlands of the wheatbelt could 
thus be the result of very recent dispersal of species into these regions, particularly from 
the north. 

Figure 7a indicates that L. subcvmosa , which occurs on North West Cape and the 
Shark Bay islands, is closely related to the arid zone species (particularly L. divaricata), 
and is only more distantly related to the south-western species. Thus, this does not sup- 
port Burbidge and George’s (1978) use of this species as an example of the close taxo- 
nomic affinity of the Shark Bay area with that of the South-West Botanical Province 
rather than with that of the Eremaean Province. This area should indeed, as they 
suggest, be part of a “transitional zone”. 

The analysis of the geographical dist ributions of the groups of closely related species 
reveals that within the South-West Botanical Province the congeners are frequently 
allopatric, sometimes sympatric, and rarely parapatric (Table 5). This suggests that, in 
this area, geographical isolation has probably played a major role in speciation within 
Lechenaultia ; and a similar pattern has been found for Acacia (Hopper and Maslin 
1978). Outside this region, most of the congeners are allopatric, which is in contrast to 
the finding of Maslin and Hopper (1982) that sympatry and allopatry are about equally 
common in central Australia. 


Table 5. Geographical relationships of the closely related species groups of Lechenaultia. 


Species group 

Geo 

Allopatric 

graphic distribution 

Parapatric Sympatric 

Sect. Patentes 

L. biloba and L. stenosepala 


4- 

L. expansa and pulvinaris 

+ 


L. floribunda and L. papillata 

+ 


Sect. I.atouria 

L. heteromera and L. lutescens 

+ 


L divaricata and L. subcvmosa 

+ 


L. brevifolia. /.. juncea and L. striata 

+ 


L. t'iliibrmis and L. ovata 


+ 

Sect. Lechenaultia 

L. hirsuta. L. laricina and L. superba 

+ 


L. longiloba and L. macrantha 


+ 

L. acutiloba and L. tubitlora 


+ 

L. chlorantha and L. formosa 

+ 



D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


99 


Acknowledgements 

Thanks to the Directors and Curators of the herbaria consulted for the use of their 
specimens; to Chas Chapman, Neville Marchant, Ken Newbey, Sue Patrick, and Rae 
Paynter for all their help in Western Australia; to Ken Newbey for his time and help in 
improving the distribution data; to Malcolm Ricketts for help with the figures; to Kerri 
Gallagher for helping throughout; to the A.S.B.S. Sydney Chapter for helpful dis- 
cussions on this work; and to Tony Auld, Roger Carolin, Peter Myerscough and Peter 
Weston for kindly commenting on an earlier version of this manuscript. The research 
was funded by the University of Sydney, the Linnean Society of N.S.W. (through the 
Joyce W. Vickery Scientific Research Fund), and the Australian Biological Resources 
Study. 


References 

Anon. (1981). More rare flora illustrated. Swans 11(2): 12-13. 

A.P.S.G. (1980). Grow What Where. Thomas Nelson, Melbourne. 

Baglin, D. and Mullins. B. (1969). “Australian Wildtlowers in Colour". Reed. Sydney. 

Baird, A.M. (1977). Regeneration after fire in King’s Park, Perth, Western Australia. Journal of the Royal So- 
ciety of Western Australia 60: 1 22. 

Baker, K.F. (1971). “Wildflowers of Western Australia”. Rigby, Perth. 

Barlow, B.A. (1984). Proposal for delineation of botanical regions in Australia. Brunonia 7: 195-201. 

Barlow, B.A. (1985) A revised natural regions map for Australia. Brunonia 8: 387-392. 

Beadle. N.C.W. (1981). “The Vegetation of Australia”. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. 

Beard, J.S. ( 1969). The vegetation of the Boorabbin and Lake Johnston areas. Western Australia. Proceedings 
of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 93: 239-269. 

Beard. J. (ed.) 1970. "A Descriptive Catalogue of West Australian Plants.” 2nd ed. for Growing Australian 
Plants. Sydney. 

Beard. J.S. (1972). “The Vegetation of the Hvden Area. Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications, Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1973a). "The Vegetation of the Ravensthorpe Area, Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications, 
Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1973b). "The Vegetation of the Esperance and Malcolm Areas, Western Australia”. Vegmap Pub- 
lications, Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1976a). “The Vegetation of the Newdegate and Bremer Bay Areas, Western Australia”, 2nd edn. 
Vegmap Publications, Perth. 

Beard. J.S. (1976b). "The Vegetation of the Shark Bay and Edel Areas, Western Australia". Vegmap Publi- 
cations, Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1976c). "The Vegetation of the Ajana Area, Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications. Perth. 

Beard, J.S. ( 1976d). “The Vegetation of the Dongara Area. Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications, Perth. 

Beard, J.S. ( 1976e). "The Vegetation of the Perenjori Area, Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications. Perth. 

Beard, J.S. ( 1979a). "The Vegetation of the Moora and Hill River Areas. Western Australia”. Vegmap Publi- 
cations, Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1979b). "The Vegetation of the Perth Area. Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications, Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1979c). “The Vegetation of the Albany and Mt. Barker Areas, Western Australia”. Vegmap Publi- 
cations, Perth. 

Beard. J.S. (1980a). “The Vegetation of the Kellerberrin Area, Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications, 
Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1980b). "The Vegetation of the Corrigin Area, Western Australia". Vegmap Publications, Perth. 

Beard, J.S. (1980c). “The Vegetation of the Dumbleyung Area, Western Australia”. Vegmap Publications, 
Perth. 

Beard, J.S. and Burns, A.C. (1976). “The Vegetat ion of the Geraldton Area, Western Australia". Vegmap Pub- 
lications, Perth. 

Bell. D.T. Loneragen, W.A. and Dodd, J. (1979). Preliminary vegetation survey of Star Swamp and vicinity, 
Western Australia. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes No. 2: 1-21. 

Blombery, A.M. (1973). “What Wildflower is That?” Paul Hamlyn, Sydney. 


100 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Boyland. D.E. (1970). Ecological and floristic studies in the Simpson Desert National Park, south western 
Queensland. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland 82: 1-16. 

Bridgewater. P.B. and Zammit. C.A. (1979). Phytosociology of S-W Australian limestone heaths. 
Phvtocoenologia 6: 327-343. 

Brown, J.M. and Hopkins. A.J.M. (1983). The kwongan (sclerophvllous shrublands) of Tutanning Nature Re- 
serve. Western Australia. Australian Journal of Ecology 8: 63-73. 

Buckley. R.C. (1981a). Soils and vegetation of central Australian sandridges II. Sandridge vegetation in the 
Uluru National Park area. Northern Territory. Australia. Australian Journal of Ecology 6: 391-404. 

Buckley. R.C. (1981b). Soils and vegetation of central Australian sandridges III. Sandridge vegetation of the 
Simpson Desert. Australian Journal of Ecology 6: 405-422. 

Buckley, R.C. (1982). Central Australian sand-ridge flora 18.000 years ago: phytogeographic evidence. In: 
“Evolution of the Flora and Fauna of Arid Australia”. Barker, W.R. and Greenslade, P.J.M. (eds) 
Peacock Publications. Adelaide, pp. 107-117. 

Buckley, R.C. (1983). The flora and vegetation of Barrow Island. Western Australia. Journal of the Royal So- 
ciety of Western Australia 66: 91-105. 

Burhidge. A.A. and George, A.S. (1978). The flora and fauna of Dirk Hartog Island, Western Australia. Journal 
of the Royal Society of Western Australia 60: 71-90. 

Burgman, M.A. and Hopper, S.D. (1982). The Western Australian Wildflower Industry 1980-81. Department 
Fisheries and Wildlife Western Australia, Report No. 53. 

Cunningham. G.M.. Mulham. W.E., Milthorpe. P.L. and Leigh. J.H. (1981). "Plants of Western New South 
Wales'". Government Printer. Sydney. 

Dodd. -J.. Meddle. E. M . Pale. J. S. and Dixon. K. W. ( 1984). Rooting patterns of sandplain plants and their 
functional significance. In: Kwongan. Plant Life of the Sandplain. Pate. J.S. and Beard J.S. (eds) Univer- 
sity of Western Australia Press. Perth, pp. 146-177. 

Elliot. W.R. and Jones, D.L. (1982). ‘ Encyclopaedia of Australian Plants Suitable for Cultivation". Volume 
1. Lothian. Melbourne. 

Erickson. R., George, A.S., Marchant. N.G. and Morcombe, M.K. (1979). “Flowers and Plants of Western Aus- 
tralia", 2nd edn. Reed. Sydney. 

Fairall. A.R. (1970). "West Australian Native Plants in Cultivation". Pergamon Press, Sydney. 

Farris, J.S. ( 1966). Estimation of conservation of characters by constancv within biological populations. Evol- 
ution 20: 587-591. 

Gardner, C.A. ( 1944). The vegetation of Western Australia with special reference to climate and soils. Journal 
of the Royal Society of Western Australia 28: xi lxxxvii. 

Gardner, C.A. ( 1978). “Wildflowers of Western Australia". 13th edn. (ed. J. Edmonds). West Australian News- 
papers. Perth. 

Gauch. H.G. and Whittaker, R.H. (1981). Hierarchial classification of community data. Journal of Ecology 69: 
537-557. 

Gauch, H.G.. Whittaker. R.H. and Singer. S.B. (1981). A comparative study of nonmetric ordinations. Journal 
of Ecology’ 69: 135-152. 

Gauch, H.G., Whittaker, R.H. and Wentworth. T.R. (1977). A comparative study of reciprocal averaging and 
other ordination techniques. Journal of Ecology 65: 157-174. 

George, A.S.. Hopkins, A.J.M. and Marchant. N.G. (1979). The heathlands of Western Australia. In: 
Ecosystems of the World, Volume 9A. Heathlands and Related Shrublands. Descriptive Studies. Specht, 
R.L. (ed.), Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp. 211-230. 

Grieve, B.J. and Blackall, W.E. (1975). "How to Know Western Australian Wildflowers, Part IV". llniversity 
of Western Australia Press, Perth. 

Griffin. E.A. and Hopkins. A.J.M. ( 1985). The flora and vegetation of Mt Lesueur, Western Australia. Journal 
of the Royal Society of Western Australia 67: 45-57. 

Griffin. E.A., Hopkins, A.J.M. and Hnatiuk. R.J. (1983). Regional variation in mediterranean-type 
shrublands near Eneabba. south-western Australia. Vegetatio 52: 103-127. 

Hartley. W. and Leigh, J. ( 1979). Plants at Risk in Australia. Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service 
Occasional Paper No. 3. 

Hill. M.O. ( 1979a). DEC'ORANA - A FORTRAN Program for Detrended Correspondence Analysis and Re- 
ciprocal Averaging. Cornell University. New York. 

Hill. M.O. (1979b). TWINSPAN - A FORTRAN Program for Arranging Multivariate Data in an Ordered 
Two-way Table by Classification of the Individuals and Attributes. Cornell University, New York. 

Hill. M.O. and Gauch. H.G. (1980). Detrended correspondence analysis: an improved ordination technique. 
Vegetatio 42: 47-58. 

Hodgson. M. and Paine, R. (1971). "A Field Guide to Australian Wildflowers", volume 1. Rigby. Perth. 

Holliday. I. (1973). "Australian Shrubs”. Rigby. Perth. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


101 


Holmgren, R.K.. Keuken. W. and Schofield, E,K. (1981). “Index Herbariorum”, part 1. The Herbaria of the 
World, Junk, The Hague. 

Hopkins, A.J.M. and Hnatiuk, R.J. (1981). An ecological survey of the kwongan south of Eneabba, Western 
Australia. Wildlife Research Bulletin Western Australia 9: 1-33. 

Hopkins. A.J.M. , Keigherv. G.J. and Merchant, N.G. ( 198.3). Species-rich uplands of south-western Australia. 
Proceedings of the Ecological Society of Australia 12: 15-26. 

Hopper. S.D. (1979). Biogeographical aspects of speciation in the southwest Australian flora. Annual Review 
of Ecology and Systematic^ 10: 399-422. 

Hopper, S.D. and Maslin, B.R. (1978). Phytogeographv of Acacia in Western Australia, Australian Journal of 
Botany 26: 63-78. 

Hubalek. /. (1982). Coefficients of association and similarity, based on binary (presence-absence) data: an 
evaluation. Biological Reviews 57: 669-689. 

Jessop. J.P. (ed.) (1981). “Flora of Central Australia’’. Reed, Sydney. 

Jessop, J.P. andToelken, H.R. (eds) (1986). "Flora of South Australia”, 4th ed. Government Printer, Adelaide. 

Johnson. R.W. (1982). Effect of weighting and the size of the attribute set in numerical classification. Aus- 
tralian Journal of Botany 30: 161-174. 

Klecka. W.R. (1975), Discriminant analysis. Ini, Statistical Package for the Social Sciences. 2nd edn. Nie, 
N.H.. Hull, C.H.. Jenkins, J.G.. Steinbrunner, K. and Bent. D.H. (eds). McGraw-Hill, New York. pp. 
434-467. 

Lamont, B.B. ( 1984). Specialised modes of nutrition. In: Kwongan. Plant Life of the Sandplain. Pate, J.S. and 
Beard, J.S. (eds). University of Western Australia Press, Perth, pp. 126-145. 

Lamont. B.B.. Hopkins, A.J.M. and Hnatiuk, R.J. (1984). The flora - composition, diversity and origins. In: 
Kwongan. Plant Life of the Sandplain. Pate. J.S. and Beard. J.S. (eds). University of Western Australia 
Press, Perth, pp. 27-50. 

Leigh. J.. Boden. R. and Briggs, J. (1984). “Extinct and Endangered Plants of Australia”. Macmillan, 
Melbourne. 

Leigh, J., Briggs, J. and Hartley, W. (1981 ). Rare or Threatened Australian Plants. Australian National Parks 
and Wildlife Service Special Publication No. 7. 

Maconochie, J.R. (1982). Regeneration of arid zone plants: a floristic survey. In: Evolution of the Flora and 
Fauna of Arid Australia. Barker, W.R. and Greens. M. (eds). Peacock Publications, Adelaide, pp. 141-144. 

Majer, J.D. (1981 ) A flowering calendar for Karragullen. a northern Jarrah forest locality. Western Australian 
Herbarium Research Notes 5: 19-28. 

Marchant, N.G. (1973), Species diversity in the southwestern flora. Journal of the Royal Society of Western 
Australia 56: 23-30. 

Marchant. N.G. and Keigherv. G.J. (1979). Poorly collected and presumably rare vascular plants in Western 
Australia. Kings Park Research Notes, 5: 1-108. 

Maslin. B.R. and Hopper, S.D. (1982). Phytogeography of Acacia (Leguminosae: Mimosoideae) in central 
Australia. In: Evolution of the Flora and Fauna of Arid Australia. Barker. W.R. and Greenslade, P.J.M. 
(eds). Peacock Publications, Adelaide, pp. 301-315. 

Melville. R. (1973). Relict plants in the Australian flora and their conservation. In: Nature Conservation in 
the Pacific Region. Costin, A.B. and Groves. R.H. (eds). Australian National University Press. Canberra, 
pp. 83-90. 

Milewski, A.V. and Davidge. C. (1981). The physical environment, florist ics and phenology’ of a Banksia wood- 
land near Perth. Western Australia. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes No. 5: 29-48. 

Morcombe, M.K. (1968). “Australia's Western Wildflowers". Landfall, Perth. 

Morcombe. M.K. (1970). "Australia’s Wildflowers”. Landsdowne. Melbourne. 

Morcombe, M. and Morcombe, I. (1970). "Wildflowers of Western Australia”. Lansdowne, Perth. 

Morrison. D.A. (1986). Taxonomic and nomenclatural notes on Lechenaultia R.Br. (Goodeniaceae). Brunonia 
9: 1-28. 

Morrison. D.A. (1987) Notes on the fruits of Lechenaultia R. Br. (Goodeniaceae), with a new species from 
northern Australia. Telopea 3: in press. 

Muir. B.G. (1976) Biological survey of the Western Australian wheatbelt. Part 1. Tarin Rock and North Tarin 
Rock Reserves. Vegetation. Records of the Western Australian Museum Supplement 2. 

Muir. B.G. (1977) Biological survey of the Western Australian wheatbelt. Part 2. Vegetation and habitat of 
Bendering Reserve. Records of the Western Australian Museum Supplement 3. 

Muir. B.G. (1979) Biological survey of the Western Australian wheatbelt. Part 7. Vegetation of Yornaning 
Nature Reserve. Records of the Western Australian Museum Supplement 8. 

Mullins, B. and Baglin. D. (1978). "Western Australian Wildflowers in Colour". Reed. Sydney. 


102 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Nelson, E.C. (1981) "Phytogeography of southern Australia. In: Ecological Biogeography of Australia". Keast, 
A. (ed.). Junk, The Hague, pp. 733-759. 

Nelson. G. and Platnick, N. (1981). "Systematics and Biogeography, Cladistics and Vicariance”. Columbia 
University Press, New York. 

Newbev. K. (1968). “West. Australian Wildllowers for Horticulture”, part 1. Society for Growing Australian 
Plants. Sydney. 

Patrick. S.J. and Hopper, S.D. (1982). Guide to the Gazetted Rare Flora of Western Australia: Supplement 
1. Department Fisheries and Wildlife Western Australia, Report No. 54. 

Platnick. N.I. (1981). "Widespread taxa and biogeographic congruence”. In: Advances in Cladistics. Funk, 
Y.A. and Brooks, D.R. (eds). New York Botanical Garden, New York. pp. 223-227. 

Rye. B.L. ( 1981). Geographically Restricted Plants of Sout hern Western Australia. Depart ment Fisheries and 
Wildlife Western Australia. Report No. 49. 

Rye. B.L. and Hopper. S.D. (1981). A Guide to the Gazetted Rare Flora of Western Australia. Department 
Fisheries and Wildlife Western Australia. Report No. 42. 

Rye. B.L., Hopper, S.D. and Watson. L.E. (1980). Commercially Exploited Vascular Plant Native in Western 
Australia; Census. Atlas and Preliminary Assessment of Conservation Status. Department Fisheries and 
Wildlife Western Australia. Report No. 40. 

Scott, J.K. (1981). A Survey Method for Identifying Roadside Flora Suitable for Conservation in South- 
Western Australia. Department Fisheries and Wildlife Western Australia. Report No. 41. 

Speck. N.H. and Baird, A.M. (1984). Vegetation of Yule Brook Reserve, near Perth. Western Australia. 
Journal of the Royal Society of Western Australia 66: 147-162. 

Spechl. R.L. (1981). "Major vegetation formations in Australia". In: Ecological Biogeographv of Australia. 
Keast. A. (ed.) Junk, The Hague, pp. 163-297. 

Specht, R.L., Roe, K.M. and Boughton, V.H. (1974). Conservation of major plant communities in Australia 
and Papua New Guinea. Australian Journal of Botany Supplement 7. 

Williams, R.F. (1932). An ecological analysis of the plant communities of the "Jarrah” region occurring on a 
small area near Darlington. Journal of the Royal Society of Western Australia 18: 105-124. 

Wrigley, J.W. and Fagg, M. (1979). "Australian Native Plants". Collins, Sydney. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


103 


Appendix 1. Notes on the distribution, ecology, morphology and conservation status of Lechenaultia 

species 


The morphological notes are based on personal observation of the herbarium 
collections, supplemented by field observations of the species. Distributional and 
ecological data are from details on the herbarium labels, also supplemented by personal 
field observations. References which contain more details of some of these aspects (eg. 
more detailed descriptions of specific habitats) are also cited. Distributional data were 
derived from the point distributions of the specimens examined, and are mapped for 
grids of 0.5° lat. x 0.5° long. The distributions are also recorded for the standard 
botanical regions currently used by each of the state herbaria, and also for the more 
recent Australian phytogeographic regions of Barlow (1985). The conservation status of 
each species is expressed using the scheme of Leigh et al. (1981), supplemented where 
necessary by more detailed observations; and the number of specimens examined is 
given, to provide some measure of species abundance. The most widely-used common 
name is also recorded, where known; and a list of checked illustrations is provided, to aid 
with the identification of the species. 


Lechenaultia acutiloba Benth., FI. Austral. 4:41 (1868) 

Distribution (Figure 8) 

Western Australia: Roe and Eyre Districts, between Ravensthorpe and Ongerup. 


Esperance Region. 

Ecology 

A small shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker. It occurs in sand or sandy 
gravel, usually in damp soil near river banks or occasionally swamps. It is found in open 
floodplains or heath, where it is never very common. Flowering is from mid September 
to late December. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. tubitlora , from which it can be readily distinguished by the 
shrubby habit, larger green flowers, and wingless corolla lobes. 


Specimens Examined 
18. 


Conservation Status 

2RC, as it is geographically localised (Marchant. and Keigherv 1979. Rye 1981) and 
restricted to a specific habitat. The river banks along which it usually occurs are, in 
many cases, parts of water conservation reserves; but these reserves are all extremely 
small, and are thus of only limited use as flora conservation areas. The species may also 
occur in Fitzgerald River National Park, but this has not been confirmed. It is exploited 
for the nursery trade (Rye et al. 1980), and is known to be in cultivation (Rye 1981). 
Newbey (1968) and Fairall (1970) discuss its cultivation requirements. 


Common Name 
Wingless lechenaultia. 


104 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Lechenaultia biloba Lindley, Sketch Veg. Swan R. 27 (1839) 


Distribution (Figure 9) 

Western Australia: Irwin, Avon, Darling, and Roe Districts. 

Bencubbin, Leeuwin. and Esperance Regions. 

Ecology' 

A sub-shrub or small shrub with a woody rootstock (cf. Majer 1981). It has been 
recorded from white, grey, yellow, orange and light brown sand, or sandy loam (Muir 
1976, 1977), often over laterite (Griffin and Hopkins 1985), as well as from gravel. It 
occurs in a wide range of heaths (Beard 1976d. 1979a, 1980b, 1980c, Muir 1979. Beadle 
1981. Hopkins and Hnatiuk 1981, Brown and Hopkins 1983, Griffin et al. 1983, Griffin 
and Hopkins 1985), scrubs (Beard 1976e, 1980b), mallee (Muir 1976. 1977, Beard 
1980b), woodlands (Beard 1979a, 1979b), and (mainly Jarrah and Marri) forests 
(Williams 1932. Majer 1981), usually occurring in open patches or even disturbed areas 
(Muir 1977). It is- often locally common in the western part of its range, but it usually 
occurs as scattered plants in the inland areas. Flowering is usually from early August to 
mid November (cf. Majer 1981, Milewski and Davidge 1981): and it has been recorded 
to flower in the first season after a March fire (Majer 1981). In the Jarrah forests, the 
roots show a high level of infection by vesicular-arbuscular mycorrhizae (Lamont 1984). 


Variability 

Flower and leaf size as well as flower colour vary greatly (see Morrison 1986), but these 
characters do not appear to be correlated. 


Notes 

Closely related to L. expansa and L. stenosepala, from which it can be readily 
distinguished by the (usually) darker blue flowers with much broader wings and a more 
hairy floral tube. In inland areas it can look similar to L. brevifolia, which has a 
distinctly scapigerous flowering habit and much reduced wings on the superior lobes of 
the flowers. 


Specimens Examined 
343. 


Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout South Western Australia. It 
is exploited for the nursery and seed trades (Rye et al. 1980, Burgman and Hopper 1982). 


Common Name 
Blue lechenaultia. 


Illustrations 

Anon. (1965) Aust. PI. 3:141; Morcombe (1968) p.12; Newbey (1968) pp. 112-3, 125; 
Baglin and Mullins (1969) p.89; Beard (1970) pl.xxxi; Fairall (1970) p.181; Morcombe 
and Morcombe (1970) p.80; Baker (1971) p.19; Hodgson and Paine (1971) p.89; Anon. 
(1973) Aust. PI. 7:115; Blomberv (1973) p.190: Holliday (1973) p.16; Grieve andBlackall 
(1975) pl.v; Green & Wittwer (1976) Aust. PI. 8:329; Gardner (1978) pp.5,130; Mullins 
and Baglin ( 1978) pi. 75; Erickson et al. ( 1979) p.46; A.P.S.G. ( 1980) between pp. 176-7. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 105 

Lechenaultia brevifolia D.A. Morrison, Brunonia 9:18 (1987) 

Distribution (Figure 10) 

Western Australia: Coolgardie and Roe Districts. 

Leonora, Bencubbin, and Esperance Regions. 

Ecology 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker. It has been found on deep yellow 
or shallow red sand, usually in low scrub or heath (Beard 1969, as L. sp. inedit.). Plants 
are usually scattered, but are sometimes common in patches. Flowering is from late 
October to early December. 

Variability 

There is some variablity in flower and ovary size between populations, but this does 
not seem to be significant. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. heteromera, from which it can be readily distinguished by the 
distinctly scapigerous flowering stems and much darker flowers, and to L.juncea and L. 
striata, which have much longer leaves and paler flowers. 

Specimens Examined 
27. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and relatively common throughout the south-eastern 
mallee of South Western Australia. 


Lechenaultia chlorantha F. Muell., Fragm. 2:20 (1860) 

Distribution (Figure 11) 

Western Australia: Irwin District, near the mouth of the Murchison River. 
Bencubbin Region. 

Ecology 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker. Little data exist on the habitat 
of this species, but it has been recorded from exposed red sandstone breakaways, where 
it is apparently uncommon. Flowering specimens have been collected in August and 
September. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. formosa and to L. linarioides, from which it can be readily 
distinguished by the green corolla. 

Specimens Examined 

7. 

Conservation Status 

2KC. as it is very geographically localised (Rye 1981) and not locally common, and it 
is currently known from only one small population. It has also been recorded from 
Kalbarri National Park (Beard 1976c): but it is not known how extensive these 


54609-8 


106 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


populations are, and the species has not been recently confirmed to be present. This 
species is very poorly collected (Marchant and Keighery 1979), and much more needs to 
be known before the conservation status can be accurately assessed. If a viable 
representation in a conservation area is demonstrated then it would be more accurately 
classified as 2RC. It is not known to be in wide cultivation (cf. Rye 1981), but see also 
A.P.S.G. (1980). 


Lechenaultia divaricata F. Muell., Fragm. 3:33 (1862) 

Distribution (Figure 12) 

Northern Territory: Central Australia North and Central Australia South Regions; 
Queensland: Gregory North and Gregory South Districts; South Australia: Lake Eyre 
Basin Region; New South Wales: North Far Western Plains Sub-division. 

MacDonnell, Thomson, Simpson, Cooper, and Torrens Regions. 

Ecology 

A small shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker (Maconochie 1982). The fruit 
is woody and often persistent for several years. It has been recorded from deep red sand 
dunes (where it occurs on the upper slopes and crests; Buckley 1981b), sandplains, 
alluvial soils, or sometimes in flood-plains (Boyland 1970), swales, or other periodically 
wet depressions. It occurs in open grassland, low open woodland (Boyland 1970), or open 
mulga (Cunningham et al. 1981). It usually occurs as scattered bushes, but is sometimes 
locally common. The plants appear to have high drought tolerance (Buckley 1982). It 
apparently flowers sporadically throughout the year. 

Variability 

Throughout its range, there is considerable variability in flower colour and size, but the 
species nevertheless remains distinctive. However, specimens are often mis-identified 
(eg. Buckley 1983, who records this species off the Western Australian coast), often in 
confusion with, for example, Scaevola depauperata or S. spinescens. Within any one 
individual plant the number of articles per pseudocapsule (and hence pseudocapsule 
size) varies greatly, unlike any other species except L. liliformis. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. subcvmosa and L. lutescens, from which it can be readily 
distinguished by the divaricate almost leafless habit. 

Specimens Examined 
125. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is apparently common and widespread throughout arid eastern 
Central Australia. Specht et al. (1974) report it to be rare in South Australia, but this 
does not appear to be the case. However, Melville (1973) and Specht et al. (1974) list it 
as a relict species that has retained primitive morphological features, and that is 
therefore worthy of particular attention. 

Common Name 
Tangled lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Cunningham et al. (1981) p.636; Jessop (1981) p.360; Jessop & Toelken (1986) p.1407. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 

Lechenaultia expansa R.Br., Prodr. 1:581 (1810) 


107 


Distribution (Figure 14) 

Western Australia: Darling District. 

Leeuwin Region. 

Ecology ’ 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock. It has been recorded from sand or peaty sand, 
where it usually occurs in swamp heath, around the edge of paperbark swamps, or in 
other permanently damp or seasonally waterlogged areas (Speck and Baird 1984). It is 
sometimes locally common. Flowering is from late October to mid January. 

Variability 

Flower and pseudocapsule size are very constant, but leaf size can vary considerably 
between populations. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. floribunda and often confused with it, particularly in the area 
around Perth where the two distributions overlap. However, L. expansa has larger and 
often minutely pitted leaves, a more densely hairy floral tube, smaller and almost equal 
corolla wings, a more thickly hairy indusium, and smaller pseudocapsules with fewer and 
ovoidal articles. 

Specimens Examined 
96. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and apparently common throughout the Jarrah and 
Marri forests of South Western Australia. It is exploited for the nursery trade (Rye et 
al. 1980). 

Lechenaultia filiformis R.Br., Prodr. 1:581 (1810) 

Distribution (Figure 13) 

Western Australia: Gardner, Fitzgerald, and Hall Districts; Northern Territory: 
Victoria River, Darwin and Gulf, and Barkly Tableland Regions; Queensland: Burke, 
Cook, and North Kennedy Districts. Also Papua-New Guinea, along the south-eastern 
coast. 

Kimberley, Arnhem, Barkly, Carpentaria, Tanami, and Cape York. 

Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub that probably grows annually from a woody rootstock. It is usually 
found in sand or sandy loam near water-courses or other low-lying areas, but it 
sometimes occurs on sandstone plateaux or granitic pebble hillsides. It is usually found 
in Triodia grassland under Eucalyptus or Melaleuca woodland, where it usually occurs 
as scattered plants. The plants apparently flower sporadically throughout the year, 
perhaps only after rain. 

Variability 

Flower size and colour is very variable, and this apparently correlates with longitude, 
as plants with the larger flowers predominate in the western part of the distribution and 
plants with the smallest ones predominate in Queensland and New Guinea (see 
Morrison 1986). 


108 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Notes 

This species and L. ovata can be readily distinguished from all of the other members 
of the genus by the fruits, which do not develop articles at the ends, and by the 
distinctive prolongation of the superior calyx lobe compared to the inferior ones. L. 
filifonnis has longer and thinner leaves than L. ovata. 

Specimens Examined 
85. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout tropical Northern Australia. 

Lechenaultia floribunda Benth., in Endl., Enum. PI. 70 (1837) 

Distribution (Figure 15) 

Western Australia: Irwin, Avon, and Darling Districts. 

Bencubbin and Leeuwin Regions. 


Ecology 

A sub-shrub or small shrub with a woody rootstock (Baird 1977, Dodd et al. 1984). It 
has been recorded from white or grey sand or loamy sand, where it occurs in heath 
(Beard 1976d, 1979a, Beadle 1981), thicket (Beard 1979a), or Banksia/Eucalyptus 
woodland with a heath understorey (Baird 1977, Milewski and Davidge 1981). It is often 
locally common. Flowering is from late August to mid December. 

Variability 

Leaf length, flower size, and flowering habit are all very variable, apparently with a 
morphocline running from north to south, with many of the northern populations 
having plants with smaller flowers, larger leaves, and a more densely-branched flowering 
habit than the southern plants (see Morrison 1986). 

Notes 

Closely related to L. expansa, from which it can be distinguished as above, and to L. 
papillata, which has papillate leaves, sepals, ovaries, and pseudocapsules. 

Specimens Examined 
108. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout the northern sandplains of 
South Western Australia. It is exploited for the nursery and seed trades (Rye et al. 1980, 
Burgman and Hopper 1982). 

Common Name 
Free-flowering lechenaultia. 


Lechenaultia formosa R.Br., Prodr. 1:581 (1810) 

Distribution (Figure 16) 

Western Australia: Irwin, Avon, Roe, Eyre, and Eucla Districts. 
Nullarbor, Bencubbin, Leeuwin, and Esperance Regions. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


109 


Ecology ' 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker (Gardner 1944). It has been 
recorded from sand and sandy soils, often over laterite or granite, as well as from clay 
and gravelly clay. It occurs in a variety of heaths (Beard 1972, 1973b, 1980c, Beadle 

1981) . scrubs, mallee (Beard 1973a, 1973b, 1976a, 1979c), and woodlands (Beard 1979c, 
1980c), where it is often locally common. Flowering apparently occurs sporadically 
throughout the year, but it is most prolific from early August to late October. 

Variability 

Flower and leaf size as well as flower colour and habit vary greatly. Large-flowered 
prostrate plants occur throughout the geographical range, but the smaller-flowered 
more erect forms are confined to the coastal strip between Albany and Cape Le Grande 
(see Morrison 1986). 

Notes 

Closely related to L. chlorantha, from which it can be readily distinguished by the red 
and orange flowers, and to L. linarioides, which is a much larger more tangled plant. 

Specimens Examined 
302. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout South Western Australia. 
However, Specht et al. (1974) recognise the conservation importance of the disjunct 
relict populations on the coastal sand sheets of the Great Australian Bight. 

It is exploited for the nursery and seed trades (Rve et al. 1980, Burgman and Hopper 

1982) . 

Common Name 
Red lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Baglin and Mullins (1969) p.91; Fairall (1970) p.182; Hodgson and Paine (1971) p.89; 
Blombery (1973) p.190; Holliday (1973) p. 1 7; Grieve and Blackall (1975) pl.v; Gardner 
(1978) p.5. 

Lechenaultia heteromera Benth., FI. Austral. 4:43 (1868) 

Distribution (Figure 17) 

Western Australia: Eyre District, between Starvation Boat Harbour and West Mt 
Barren. 

Esperance Region. 

Ecology 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock. It is usually found in deep white sand, where it 
occurs in heath (Beard 1973a, Beadle 1981, as L. stenosepala , Beard 1976a, as L. 
stenomera), open scrub, or Banksia woodland. It is usually infrequent. Flowering is from 
late August to Late November. 

Variability 

This is a relatively constant species, varying only moderately in flower colour, leaf 
density, and the degree to which the leaves are reflexed. 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 

Notes 

Closely related to L. brevifolia, L. juncea, and L. striata, from which it can be readily 
distinguished by the non-scapigerous flowering habit and scattered, thicker, recurved 
leaves. It is also sometimes confused with L. biloba, which has subequal wings on all of 
the petal lobes. 

Specimens Examined 
45. 

Conservation Status 

Although it has a restricted distribution it is common throughout its range, and is 
therefore probably not at risk. It is represented in Fitzgerald River National Park. 

Common Names 

Claw lechenaultia (Erickson et al. 1979); Hook-leaf lechenaultia (Grieve and Blackall 
1975). 


Lechenaultia hirsuta F. Muell., Fragm. 6:9 (1867) 

Distribution (Figure 18) 

Western Australia: Irwin District. Bencubbin and Leeuwin Regions. 

Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub with a woody rootstock. It occurs in white or light brown sand or 
lateritic sand, where it is commonly found in low open heath (Beard 1976c, 1976d, 
Hopkins and Hnatiuk 1981). It is often frequent, especially when regenerating after fire. 
Flowering is from early September to mid December. 

Variability 

This is a very distinctive and relatively constant species, but it does vary somewhat 
within populations in leaf size and density. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. superba and to L. laricina, from which it can be readily 
distinguished by the extreme hirsuteness. 

Specimens Examined 
56. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common on the northern sandplains of South 
Western Australia. It is exploited for the nursery trade (Rye et al. 1980, Burgman and 
Hopper 1982). 

Common Name 
Hairy lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Morcombe (1968) p.110; Morcombe (1970) p.98; Morcombe and Morcombe (1970) 
p.81; Baker (1971) p. 19; Blombery (1973) p. 19 1 ; Grieve and Blackall (1975) pl.vi; 
Gardner (1978) p.5; Erickson et al. (1979) p.98; Grafter (1983) Aust. PL 12:56. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 

Lechenaultia juncea E. Pritzel, Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 35:553 (1905) 


ill 


Distribution (Figure 19) 

Western Australia: Irwin District, between Three Springs and Gunyidi. Bencubbin 
Region. 

Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub with a woody rootstock. It occurs in sand or sandy gravel, in heath 
(Beard 1976d, Beadle 1981, as L.juncoides). It is usually infrequent, and usually growing 
amongst the branches of other plants. It is now only recorded in fields, and along road 
margins. Flowering is usually from late November (sometimes earlier) to mid December. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. brevifolia, which has much darker-blue flowers and shorter leaves, 
L. striata , which has much thinner more crowded leaves and larger flowers and 
pseudocapsules, and L. beteromera, which does not have the scapigerous flowering 
habit. This species has also been confused with L. subcymosa, from which it can be 
distinguished by the more upright junciform habit and the much longer sepals. 

Specimens Examined 

8. 

Conservation Status 

2V, as it is geographically localised (Rye 1981), and currently known only from a few 
roadside verges and relatively undisturbed fields in farmland. This species is very poorly 
collected (Marchant and Keighery 1979), and it is not known from any conservation 
reserves or known to be in cultivation (cf. Rye 1981 ) . This species would be classified as 
2E, except that there are a couple of good populations in protected areas in farmland 
that will hopefully become conservation reserves in the near future (cf. Beard 1976d). 

Common Name 
Reedy lechenaultia. 

Lechenaultia laricina Lindley, Sketch Veg. Swan R. 27 (1839) 

Distribution (Figure 20) 

Western Australia: Avon District, between Meckering and Clackline, and between 
Kukerin and Moulyinning. Bencubbin and Leeuwin Regions. 

Ecology 

A small shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker. In the past, this species has been 
recorded from sand or occasionally gravelly loam, usually in woodland. It is now known 
only from disturbed areas in farmland. Flowering is from late October to late December. 

Variability 

This species is relatively constant morphologically, but it does vary somewhat in 
flower colour, with some populations being less scarlet than others. As well, some 
variation exists between the tw'o disjunct groups of populations of this species, the 
southern group being much more prostrate plants, with greyish bark and somewhat 
smaller flowers. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. hirsuta, from which it can be readily distinguished by the glabrous 
habit, and to L. superba, which has a more upright habit, longer leaves, and yellowish 
flowers with a broader tube. However, this species is apparently persistently and 


112 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


frequently confused with other species (see Morrison 1986), usually resulting in the 
identification of other species (often L. formosa ) as L. laricina. This has, in the past, 
suggested that L. laricina occurs over a much larger area than it really does (cf. the map 
in Rye et al. 1980) and that it has been collected much more frequently. It was 
apparently this confusion that caused Marchant and Keigherv (1979) and subsequent 
workers to overlook this species as an endangered taxon. 

Specimens Examined 
17. 

Conservation Status 

2E. This species was once apparently common in the area between Meenaar, 
Meckering, and Northam (Gardner 1978), but in this area it is now known from only two 
populations in farmland. Both of these populations are currently being protected, but 
this relies entirely on the goodwill of the people concerned, and one of the populations 
appears to have contracted recently. The only other reliable collection localities are near 
Kukerin, where it has not been found recently. It thus seems that this species is under 
immediate threat, especially as no populations have been reported in conservation 
areas. Gazettal as protected flora is therefore essential. The species is reported to be 
exploited for the nursery trade (Rye et al. 1980. Burgman and Hopper 1982), but the 
collection locality given by Burgman and Hopper (1982) suggests that many of these 
reports may be mis-identifications (see above). Fortunately, it is apparently in wide 
cultivation, as this would seem to be critical for the continued survival of the species. 
Fairall (1970) discusses its cultivation requirements. 

Common Name 
Scarlet lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Fairall (1970) p.183; Grieve and Blackall (1975) pl.v; Gardner (1978) p.5. 


Lechenaultia linarioides DC.. Prodr. 7:519 (1839) 

Distribution! Figure 21) 

Western Australia: Irwin and Darling Districts, and Carnarvon District on the Shark 
Bay peninsulas. Murchison, Bencubbin, and Leeuwin Regions. 

Ecology r 

A small shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker. It occurs in deep white or 
yellow sand, where it is found in open-heath (Beard 1976c, 1976d, 1979a, 1979'b, 
Burbidge and George 1978. Bell et al. 1979, Bridgewater and Zammit 1979, George et al. 
1979, Beadle 1981), scrub (Beard 1976c, 1976d. Beard and Burns, 1976), or occasionally 
woodland (Bell et al. 1979). It is often locally common. Plants apparently flower 
sporadically throughout the year, but flowering is mainly from early August to early 
December. 

Variability 

Stature, leaf and flower size, and flower colour are all very variable. The isolated group 
of plants near Shark Bay are taller and more densely shrubby with thicker branches 
than the southern ones, which tend to be more sprawling. Flower size and colour varies 
considerably between populations, and the flowers themselves also apparently become 
redder with age. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


113 


Notes 

Similar to L. formosa and L. chlorantha, from which it can be readily distinguished by 
the thicker stems with downcurved branchtips and more scattered leaves, as well as by 
the larger flowers. 

Specimens Examined 
135. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout the northern sandplains of 
South Western Australia. It is exploited for the nursery and seed trades (Rye et al. 1980, 
Burgman and Hopper 1982). 

Common Name 
Yellow lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Morcombe and Morcombe (1970) p.80 (as L. linaroides)- Hodgson and Paine (1971) 
p.91; Blombery (1973) p. 191 ; Grieve and Blackall (1975) pl.v; Gardner (1978) p.131. 

Lechenaultia longiloba F. Muell., Fragm. 6:10 (1867) 

Distribution (Figure 22) 

Western Australia: Irwin District, between Mullewa and Dongara. Bencubbin Region. 
Ecology ' 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker. It has been recorded in deep 
white or grey earthy sand, in open heath (Beard 1976d). It was apparently once common 
in Banksia heath (especially if regenerating after fire), but it is now more commonly 
found along disturbed roadsides. Flowering is usually from late July to early October, but 
it sometimes continues sporadically until early December. 

Variability 

This is a relatively constant species, but there is some variability between populations 
in flower colour (varying from red to yellowish) and flower size. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. hirsuta, from which it can be easily distinguished by the glabrous 
habit, and to L. macrantha, which has longer leaves (which are characteristically held 
to one side of the branch), larger wings, and a shorter broader corolla tube. 

Specimens Examined 
30. 

Conservation Status 

2VC, as it is geographically localised (Rye 1981), and is now known from only a few 
populations along roadsides in farmland (see Leigh et al. 1984 for a more detailed 
discussion), and from one population in an ”A Class” conservation reserve (Beard and 
Burns 1976). Gazettal as protected flora would seem to be appropriate, and it may be 
necessary to manage the roadside verges specifically to maintain this species (cf. Scott 
1981). Hartley and Leigh (1979) report it to have been subject to heavy commercial 
exploitation in the wild, but this has not been confirmed (cf. Rye et al. 1980). It is not 
known to be in wide cultivation (Leigh et al. 1984), and horticultural propagation would 
seem to be essential to ensure the continued survival of this species. 


114 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Common Name 
Irwin lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Baglin and Mullins (1969) p.91; Grieve and Blackall (1975) pl.v; Erickson et al. (1979) 
p.107; Crafter (1983) Aust. PI. 12:57; Leigh et al. (1984) between pp. 192-3. 

Lechenaultia lutescens D.A. Morrison & R.C. Carolin, Brunonia 9:15 (1987) 

Distribution (Figure 26) 

Northern Territory: Central Australia North, and Central Australia South Regions; 
Western Australia: Mueller, Giles, Carnegie, and Helms Districts. Gibson, Tanami, 
MacDonnell, and Victoria Desert Regions. 

Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub with a woody rootstock. It has been recorded from deep red sand 
dunes, sandy loam plains, or around the gravelly edges of lateritic breakaways. It occurs 
among mallees, desert oak, open Triodia grassland, or Spinifex open scrub, where it is 
often locally common. Flowering apparently occurs sporadically throughout the year, 
perhaps only after recent rain. 

Variability 

This species varies somewhat between populations in leaf size, and flower size and 
colour, but this does not seem to be significant. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. heteromera , from which it can be readily distinguished by the 
yellow flowers and shorter calyx lobes. It has also been confused with L. striata, which 
has a distinctly scapigerous flowering habit and ridged rather than grooved articles. 

Specimens Examined 

21 . 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout arid western Central 
Australia. 

Lechenaultia macrantha K. Krause, Pflanzenr., IV. 54:100 (1912) 

Distribution (Figure 23) 

Western Australia: Irwin and Avon Districts; and one isolated collection in Irwin 
District, near Nerren Nerren station, and one in Austin District, near Boolardy station. 

Murchison and Bencubbin Regions. 

Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub that grows annually from a woody rootstock (Erickson et al. 1979). 
It occurs in yellow sand or, more usually, red gravelly soil, in open areas near heathland 
(Beard 1976e), or along road margins or other disturbed areas. It is usually locally 
common. Flowering is from mid August to late October. 

Variability 

Leaf size, and flower colour and size vary considerably between plants. Much of this 
variability appears to be latitudinal, with the more northern inland plants having the 
larger organs. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


115 


Notes 

Closely related to L. longiloba, from which it can be readily distinguished by the 
wreath-like flowering habit, longer leaves and sepals, and larger petals with broader 
wings. 

Specimens Examined 
40. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is relatively widespread and common on the inland red gravels of 
northern South Western Australia. Both Specht et al. (1974) and Hartley and Leigh 
(1979) consider the species to have suffered marked depletions in distribution, but as it 
apparently responds well to disturbance this is probably not as big a problem as was first 
thought. Hartley and Leigh (1979) record the species as occurring in conservation 
reserves. They also report it to have been subject to heavy commercial exploitation in 
the wild, but this has not been confirmed (cf. Rye et al. 1980). 

Common Name 
Wreath lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Morcombe (1968) p.31; Newbey (1968) p.125; Baker (1971) p.19; Blombery (1973) 
p.191; Grieve and Blackall (1975) pl.v; Gardner (1978) pp. 131-2; Erickson et al. (1979) 
p.118; Crafter (1983) Aust. PI. 12:56. 


Lechenaultia ovata D.A. Morrison, Telopea 3: in press 
Distribution (Figure 26) 

Northern Territory: Darwin and Gulf Region. Arnhem Region. 

Ecology 

A herb that probably grows annually from a woody rootstock. It has been collected 
from short sedgeland in a sandy depression on a sandstone plateau. The specimen was 
flowering in February. 

Notes 

This species can be readily distinguished from all of the other members of this genus 
by the ovate leaves. 

Specimens Examined 

1 . 

Conservation Status 

IK, as it is known only from the type collecion (see Morrison 1987). The population 
is apparently fairly large, but the locality is just outside Kakadu National Park. 
Intensive searches need to be made in the area to correctly ascertain the status of this 
species. 


Lechenaultia papillata D.A. Morrison, Brunonia 9:12 (1987) 
Distribution (Figure 24) 

Western Australia: Roe District. Esperance Region. 


116 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Ecology 

A sub-shrub or small shrub with a woody rootstock. It has been recorded from yellow 
or white sand, loamy sand, and gravelly loam. It usually occurs in heath (Beard 1969, 
Beadle 1981, as L. expansa), low open scrub, or eucalypt scrub mallee, where it may be 
locally common. Flowering is usually from late October to late November. 

Variability 

Flower size is somewhat variable, but the species nevertheless remains distinctive. 
Notes 

Closely related to L. floribunda, from which it can be readily distinguished by the 
shorter more crowded leaves, the papillate leaves, sepals, ovaries and pseudocapsules, 
and the much more hairy floral tube. 

Specimens Examined 
14. 

Conservation Status 

Although poorly collected, this species occurs in an area that is sparsely collected in 
general. Given the large area over which collections have been made, the species is 
probably not at risk. It is represented in Frank Hann National Park. 


Lechenaultia pulvinaris C. Gardner, J. Roy. Soc. W. Austral. 47:63 (1964) 
Distribution (Figure 25) 

Western Australia: Avon District, between Corrigin and Wagin, and near Beverley. 
Bencubbin and Leeuwin Regions. 

Ecology' 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock. It occurs in deep white sand on plains or gentle 
slopes, sometimes near low-lying seepage areas. It only grows in open patches in low 
scrub, becoming absent as the vegetation becomes more dense with age. It is often locally 
common. Flowering is from mid October to early December. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. expansa , from which it can be easily discerned by the dense 
pulvinate habit, like that of L. tubiflora. It can be readily distinguished from L. tubiflora 
by the hispid foliage and calyx lobes. 

Specimens Examined 

12 . 

Conservation Status 

3VC, as, although it is not geographically localised (but see Rye et al. 1980), it occurs 
only in open patches in the vegetation. It is known from only a few apparently disjunct 
areas (see Leigh et al. 1984), and. although only rediscovered and described in the early 
1960s, it was in fact collected late last century. It has been recently reported to occur 
around the edges ot a number of small “A Class” conservation reserves, but it appears 
to become absent from the vegetation as the vegetation becomes more dense with age. 
Much more needs to be known about its biology before it can be decided how widespread 
the species is and whether it is adequately conserved (and therefore more appropriately 
categorised as 3RC). Hartley and Leigh (1979) report it to have been subject to heavy 
commercial exploitation in the wild, but the species is now protected as gazetted rare 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


117 


flora (Patrick and Hopper 1982). However, it should be introduced into cultivation to 
ensure the long term survival of the species, and Newbey (1968) discusses its cultivation 
requirements. 

Common Name 
Cushion lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Anon. (1981) between pp.12-3; Rye and Hopper (1981) p.145; Leigh et al. (1984) 
between pp. 192-3. 


Lechenaultia stenosepala E. Pritzel, Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 35:552 (1905) 

Distribution (Figure 28) 

Western Australia: Irwin and Darling Districts. Bencubbin and Leeuwin Regions. 
Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker. It is found in yellow or 
white sand or sandy gravel, where it is usually recorded from low open heath (Beard 
1976d, Hopkins and Hnatiuk 1981), often in damp depressions or valley floors. It is 
often locally common, especially as regrowth after fire. Flowering is from early October 
to mid December. 

Variability 

Leaf and flower size vary considerably, and this apparently correlates with latitude, 
the largest leaves and flowers only occurring on plants in the northern part of the 
distribution, and the smallest leaves and flowers only occurring in the southern part (see 
Morrison 1986). 

Notes 

Closely related to L. floribunda, from which it can be readily distinguished by the 
longer sepals, and to L. biloba, which has flowers of a much deeper blue and with much 
larger corolla wings. 

Specimens Examined 
51. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common on the northern sandplains of South 
Western Australia. 

Common Name 
Narrow-sepaled lechenaultia. 


Lechenaultia striata F. Muell., Fragm. 8:245 (1874) 

Distribution (Figure 27) 

Northern fl eriitory. Central Australia South Region; South Australia: North-western 
Region; Western Australia: Giles, Canegie, Helms, and Austin Districts. Gibson, 
MacDonnell, Leonora, and Victoria Desert Regions. 


118 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. (1987) 


Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker (Maconochie 1982). It is 
found on deep red sand dunes, where it is characteristic of the mid and upper slopes 
(Buckley 1981a). It occurs in open Triodia grassland or Spinifex open scrub, where it is 
often locally common, especially after recent rain. Plants appear to have only a 
moderate drought tolerance (Buckley 1982). Flowering apparently occurs sporadically 
throughout the year (perhaps only after recent rain), but it is usually from late August 
to mid November. 

Variability 

This species varies considerably between plants in leaf, flower and pseudocapsule size, 
and somewhat less in flower colour. None of this variation appears to be correlated. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. brevifolia . from which it can be readily distinguished by the longer 
leaves, and to L. lutescens, which does not have the scape-like flowering stems. 

Specimens Examined 
34. 

Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout arid western Central 
Australia. Specht et al. (1974) report it to be rare in the Northern Territory, but this 
does not appear to be the case. 

Common Name 
Striate-stemmed lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Jessop & Toelken (1986) p.1407. 


Lechenaultia subcymosa C. Gardner & A.S. George, J. Roy. Soc. W. Austral 46' 134 
(1963) 

Distribution (Figure 29) 

Western Australia: Carnarvon District, on North West Cape and on the Shark Bay 
islands. Murchison Region. 

Ecology 

A herb or sub-shrub with a woody rootstock. It has been recorded from sand or loam 
over limestone (Burbidge and George 1978) or in red sand dunes, where it occurs with 
scattered low shrubs. It is often found in very dense stands regenerating after fire. 
Flowering apparently occurs sporadically throughout the year (perhaps only after a 
recent fire), but it is usually from late July to early October. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. divaricata, from which it can be readily discerned by the larger 
leaves, smaller flowers, and non-moniliform pseudocapsule. 

Specimens Examined 
15. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


119 


Conservation Status 

Although poorly collected, this species occurs in an area that is sparsely collected in 
general. As it is apparently common where it does occur, the species is probably not at 
risk. 

Common Name 
Wide-branching lechenaultia. 


Lechenaultia superba F. Muell., Fragm. 6:10 (1867) 

Distribution (Figure 30) 

Western Australia: Eyre District, at the eastern end of the Barrens. Esperance region. 
Ecology 

A small shrub with a woody rootstock. It only occurs in quartzite soils on rocky 
hillsides or in open gullies, where it is found in open patches in thick scrub. Plants are 
sometimes locally common. Flowering is usually from September to October, but 
flowering plants have been recorded at other times. 

Notes 

Closely related to L. hirsuta, from which it can be readily distinguished by the glabrous 
habit, and to L. laricina, which has a low spreading habit. 

Specimens Examined 
19. 

Conservation Status 

2RC, as it is geographically localised (Rye 1981) and restricted to a specific habitat. 
Almost the entire known distribution is within Fitzgerald River National Park, but the 
number of known plants is very small (Rye 1981). It is known to be in cultivation (Rye 
1981, Rye and Hopper 1981), and Fairall (1970) discusses its cultivation requirements. 
It is also protected as gazetted rare flora (Patrick and Hopper 1982). 

Common Name 
Barrens lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Erickson et al. (1979) p.92; Anon. (1981) between pp.12-3; Rye and Hopper (1981) 
p.147. 


Lechenaultia tubiflora R.Br., Prodr. 1:581 (1810) 

Distribution (Figure 31) 

Western Australia: Irwin, Avon, Darling, and Eyre Districts. Bencubbin, Leeuwin, and 
Esperance Regions. 

Ecology 

A sub-shrub with a woody rootstock that may sucker (Gardner 1944). It has been 
recorded from deep yellow or white sand, where it usually occurs in open patches in 
mixed heath (Beard 1973a, 1979c, 1980a, Beadle 1981), or Eucalyptus or Banksia 
woodland. It is often locally common, especially on bare ground. Flowering appears to 
occur sporadically throughout spring and summer, but it is mainly from late September 
to early December. 


120 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Variability 

Apart from flower colour and leaf size, which can vary considerably within a single 
population, this species is apparently differentiated into coastal and inland forms (see 
Morrison 1986). 

Notes 

Closely related to L. acutiloba , from which it can be readily distinguished by the 
smaller flowers and winged corolla lobes. The prostrate habit is similar to that of L. 
pulvinaris, which has hispid leaves and calyx lobes. 

Specimens Examined 
153. 


Conservation Status 

Not at risk, as it is widespread and common throughout South Western Australia. 

Common Name 
Heath lechenaultia. 

Illustrations 

Beard (1970) pl.xxxi; Morcombe (1970) p.110; Walton (1970) Aust. PI. 5:248; Wrigley 
(1970) Aust. PI. 5:241; Blombery (1973) p.191; Holliday (1973) p.16; Grieve and Blackall 
(1975) pl.iv; Erickson et al. (1979) p.84; Wrigley and Fagg (1979) pp. 128-9; Elliot and 
Jones (1982) p.185. 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


121 



Figure 9. Distribution of L. biloba 





Figure 11. Distribution of L. chlorantha 


34609-9 


122 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 




Figure 13. Distribution of L. filiformis 



D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


123 



Figure 14. Distribution of L. expansa 


Figure 15. Distribution of L. floribunda 



1 1 5°E ' ' ’ 120° e' ' ' 125*E' 




L 

>■ / 



r 


X 


WEST 

20°S 

ERN AUSTRAL 

A 


S 




j 


















JL 













4 











s' 















\r 















4 

U 











— 




















































4 

















r— 

















1 











— 






















V- 
















4 















1 














35*S 


J 












X 

w 








11 e 

1 L- . 1 A 





°E 12 

5°E 

__l L . 

°E 

— i 1 

120 


Figure 17. Distribution of L. heteromera 



124 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


1 

1 5*E 

20*E 1 

25*E 

L 


-v 


r* 


r v 

► r 

WEST 

20'S 

ERN AUSTRAL 

IA 


c 

r- 





\ 









V 









JL 











i 












. . 














\f 

> 

f 













4 
















1 
















\ 

















% 

) 















V 
































5 

S 





























1 
















Ai 




























| 

j 











- 

"V 









_ 11 

>*E 



12C 

°E 12 

5* E 


Figure 18. Distribution of L. hirsuta 



1 5*E 

20* E 1 

25’E 






r- 

WEST 

20*S 

ERN AUSTRAL 

A 


C 

c 



fC 

/ 









_ 










i/ 











> 


























if 

> 














4 

u 















1 
















1 
















' 


u 















3 
































30*S 

\ 
































LF 















4 





























1 

✓ 








_/ 




~v 









11 

3*E 



120 

°E 12 

j*E 


Figure 19. Distribution of L. juncea 



Figure 20. Distribution of L. laricina 


Figure 21. Distribution of L. linarioides 


D.A. Morrison. The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


125 






Figure 24. Distribution of L. papillata 


Figure 25. Distribution of L. pulvinaris 


126 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. (1987) 




Figure 27. Distribution of L. striata 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


127 



Figure 28. Distribution of L. stenosepala 



Figure 29. Distribution of L. subcymosa 


1 1 5"E ' ' ' 120* E 1 2 5'E 






, ,r 







WEST 

ERN AUSTRAL 

A 


£ 

r 



r 

JL 



















1/ 











J 











> 

- - 














l r 















4 

u 































i 
















1 

4 

































. 

















\ 

















































1 










































X 














‘E 12 

5*E 

1 1 

5*E 


12C 



Figure 30. Distribution of L. superba 


Figure 31. Distribution of L. tubiflora 



128 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


Appendix 2. Lechenaultia species recorded (or considered likely) to occur in 0.5° lat. x 0.5° long, 
grid cells of South Western Australia and adjacent areas. Occurrences not represented by a her- 
barium specimen are in brackets. The grid cell numbers and names are those of the Division of 
National Mapping’s coding system for the 1:100.000 topographic maps. 


1446 QUOIN 
(L. linarioides ) 

L. subcvmosa 



1547 DORRE 

L. subcvmosa 




1546 DENHAM 

L. linarioides 

(L. subcvmosa) 



1545 EDEL 

L. linarioides 

L. subcvmosa 



1646 SHARK BAY 
L. linarioides 




1645 PERON 

L. linarioides 




1743 C00LCURDA 
L. hirsuta 

(L. linarioides) 



1742 KALBARR1 

L. chlorantha 

L. floribunda 

L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 

1741 HUTT 

L. tloribunda 

L. linarioides 



1844 WANNOO 

L. floribunda 




1843 NERREN NERREN 

L. floribunda L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 

L. macrantha 

1842 A.JANA 

L. floribunda 

L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 

L. macrantha 

1841 NORTHAMPTON 

L. floribunda L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 


1840 GERALDTON 
L. floribunda 

(L. hirsuta) 

L. linarioides 

L. longiloba 

1839 DONGARA 

L. floribunda 

(L. linarioides) 



1838 BEAGLE ISLANDS 

(L. biloba) (L. floribunda) 

L. linarioides 


1837 GREEN HEAD 

(L. biloba) (L. floribunda) 

L. linarioides 


1830 CLAIRAULT 
( L . biloba) 

( L . expansa) 



1829 TOOKER 
(L. biloba ) 

(L. expansa) 



1942 COOLCALALAYA 
(L. macrantha) 




1941 MUNGO 


L. floribunda 

L. macrantha 




1940 INDARRA 

L. tloribunda 

( L . hirsuta) 

L. linarioides 

L. longiloba 

L. macrantha 

1939 MINGENEW 
L. floribunda 

L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 

L. longiloba 

L. macrantha 

1938 ARROWSMITH 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 

L. stenosepala 

1937 HILL RIVER 
L. biloba 

L. floribunda 

L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 

L. stenosepala 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


129 


1936 WEDGE ISLAND 


L. bilnba L. floribunda 

L. linarioides 

L. stenosepala 


1935 LEDGE POINT 

(L. biloba ) (L. floribunda ) 

L. linarioides 

(L. stenosepala) 


1930 BUSSELTON 

L. biloba L. expansa 




1929 LEEUWIN 

L. biloba L. expansa 




2041 TALLERING 

L. floribunda L. macrantha 




2040 MULLEWA 

(L. floribunda) L. macrantha 




2039 YANDANOOKA 

L. floribunda L. hirsuta 

L. linarioides 

(L. macrantha) 


2038 CARNAMAH 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

L. linarioides L. stenosepala 

L. formosa 

( L . hirsuta) 

L. juncea 

2037 BADGINGARRA 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

L. linarioides L. stenosepala 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 

L. hirsuta 

(L. juncea) 

2036 DANDARAGAN 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

L. linarioides 

L. stenosepala 

L. tubiflora 

2035 GINGIN 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

L. linarioides 

L. stenosepala 

L. tubiflora 

2034 PERTH 

L. biloba L. expansa 

L. floribunda 

L. linarioides 

L. tubiflora 

2033 FREMANTLE 

L. biloba L. expansa 

L. floribunda 

L. linarioides 


2032 PIN.JARRA 

L. biloba L. expansa 




2031 BUNBURY 

L. biloba L. expansa 




2030 DONNYBROOK 

L. biloba L. expansa 




2029 DONNELLY 

L. biloba L. expansa 




2028 MEERUP 
( L . expansa) 




2141 WURARGA 

L. floribunda 




2140 MELLENBYE 

L. macrantha 




2139 PEREN.JOR1 

L. macrantha 




2138 CARON 

L. biloba L. juncea 

L. linarioides 

L. macrantha 


2137 WATHEROO 

(L. biloba ) L. floribunda 

L. juncea 

L. linarioides 

L. stenosepala 

2136 MOORA 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

(L. formosa) 

L. linarioides 

( L . stenosepala) 

2135 CHITTERING 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

L. formosa 

L. linarioides 

L. stenosepala 

2134 WOOROLOO 

L. biloba L. expansa 

L. tubiflora 

L. floribunda 

L. formosa 

L. linarioides 

2133 JARRAHDALE 

L. biloba L. expansa 

L. floribunda 

L. linarioides 


2132 DWELLINGUP 

L. biloba L. expansa 





130 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


2131 COLLIE 

L. biloba L. expansa 

2130 BRIDGETOWN 
L. biloba L. expansa 

2129 MANJIMUP 

L. biloba L. expansa 

2128 NORTHCLIFFE 

L. expansa 

2244 BOOLARDY 
L. macrantha 

2238 MONGERS 

L. macrantha 

2237 DALWALLINU 

L. biloba 

2236 WONGAN 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

2235 GOOMALLING 


L. biloba 

L. floribunda 




2234 NORTHAM 
L. biloba 

L. floribunda 

L. formosa 

L. laricina 

L. tubiflora 

2233 BEVERLEY 
L. biloba 

( L . floribunda) 

L. formosa 

L. pulvinaris 



2232 CROSSMAN 
L. biloba 

2231 DARKAN 
L. biloba 

2230 DINNINUP 
L. biloba 

2229 TONEBRIDGE 
L. biloba L. expansa 

2228 DEEP RIVER 

L. expansa 

2227 RAME HEAD 
L. expansa 

2338 MOUNT GIBSON 

L. macrantha 

2336 KOORDA 
L. biloba 

2335 DOWERIN 

L. biloba L. floribunda 

2334 CUNDERDIN 


(L. oiloba) 

L. floribunda 

L. formosa 

L. 

tubiflora 

2333 BROOKTON 
L. biloba 

L. floribunda 

( L . formosa) 

L. 

tubiflora 

2332 NARROGIN 
L. biloba 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 



2331 WAGIN 

L. biloba 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 



2330 KOJONUP 

L. biloba 

L. formosa 

L.tubiflora 




2329 FRANKLAND 

(L. tubiflora) 

2328 DENMARK 

L. expansa L. tubiflora 

2327 PARRY INLET 

L. expansa 

2434 KELLERBERRIN 

L. biloba L. formosa L. tubiflora 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


131 


2433 CORRIGIN 

(L. biloba ) (L. formosa) L. tubiflora 


2432 YEALERING 

(L. biloba) ( L . formosa) 

L. pulvinaris 

L. tubiflora 


2431 DUMBLEYUNG 

L. biloba (L. formosa) 

L. laricina 

L. pulvinaris 

( L . tubiflora) 

2430 KATANNING 

L. biloba L. formosa 

( L . tubiflora) 



2429 TAMBELLUP 

L. formosa L. tubiflora 




2428 MOUNT BARKER 

L. expansa L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 



2427 ALBANY 

L. expansa L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 




2534 BRUCE ROCK 

L. biloba (L. formosa) 

2533 NAREMBEEN 
L. biloba 

2532 KULIN 


L. biloba 

L. formosa 


2531 KUKERIN 

L. biloba 

( L . formosa) 

L. tubiflora 

2530 NYABING 

L. acutiloba 

L. formosa 

( L . tubiflora ) 

2529 BORDEN 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 


2528 MANYPEAKS 
L. expansa 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 

2527 BREAKSEA 

L. expansa 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 

2634 MUNTADGIN 
( L . formosa) 



2633 HYDEN 

L. formosa 



2632 PEDERAH 
( L . formosa) 



2631 BURNGUP 

L. biloba 

L. formosa 


2630 JERRAMUNGUP 

L. acutiloba L. formosa 

( L . tubiflora) 

2629 PALLINUP 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 


2628 CHEYNE 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 


2735 SOUTHERN CROSS 

L. brevifolia 


2734 HOLLETON 
(L. brevifolia ) 

L. formosa 


2733 O'CONNOR 

L. brevifolia 

(L. formosa) 


2732 HURLSTONE 
(L. formosa) 



2731 NEWDEGATE 

L. biloba L. formosa 

L. papillata 

2730 JACUP 

L. acutiloba 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 

2729 BREMER 

L. formosa 

L. heteromera 

L. tubiflora 

2728 CAPE KNOB 
(L. formosa) 

( L . tubiflora) 



132 


Kingia Vol. 1, No. 1 (1987) 


2835 YELLOWDINE 

L. brevifolia 




2834 CHERITONS FIND 
(L. brevifolia) 




2833 HOLLAND 
( L . brevifolia) 

L. formosa 

L. papillata 



2832 IRONCAP 

L. brevifolia 

( L . formosa) 

(L. papillata) 



2831 KING 

L. brevifolia 

L. formosa 

L. heteromera 

L. papillata 

2830 COCANARUP 
L. acutiloba 

L. formosa 

L. heteromera 

L. superba 

2829 HOOD POINT 
L. formosa 

L. heteromera 

L. superba 

L. 

tubiflora 

2935 BOORABBIN 
(L. brevifolia) 





2934 LAKE PERCY 
(L. brevifolia) 





2933 ROUNDTOP 
(L. brevifolia) 





2932 HOPE 

L. brevifolia 

L. formosa 

L. papillata 



2931 MOOLYALL 
( L . brevifolia) 

L. formosa 

L. papillata 



2930 RAVENSTHORPE 

L. formosa L. heteromera 

L. superba 

L. 

tubiflora 

3035 WOOLGANGIE 

L. brevifolia 




3034 DIAMOND ROCK 
(L. brevifolia) 




3033 JOHNSTON 
(L. brevifolia ) 





3032 TAY 

L. brevifolia 

L. papillata 




3031 NORTHOVER 
(L. brevifolia) 

(L. formosa) 

L. papillata 



3030 OLDFIELD 

L. formosa 

L. heteromera 

L. tubiflora 



3132 PEAK CHARLES 

(L. brevifolia ) ( L . papillata) 




3131 LORT 
(L. brevifolia) 

L. formosa 

( L . papillata ) 



3130 STOKES INLET 

L. formosa L. tubiflora 




3232 DUNDAS 
(L. brevifolia) 

L. formosa 

(L. papillata) 



3231 SCADDAN 

L. brevifolia 

L. formosa 

(L. papillata) 



3230 ESPERANCE 
L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 




3332 COWALINYA 
(L. brevifolia) 

(L. papillata ) 




3331 BURDETT 
(L. brevifolia) 

L. formosa 

(L. papillata) 



3330 MERIVALE 

L. formosa 

L. tubiflora 




3432 MOUNT ANDREW 

(L. brevifolia) ( L . papillata) 




3431 BEAUMONT 
L. brevifolia 

L. papillata 





(L. tubiflora ) 


D.A. Morrison, The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia. 


133 


3430 HOWICK 
L. formosa L 

3531 BURAMINYA 
L. papillata 

3530 SANDY BIGHT 
L. formosa L 

3630 MALCOLM 
L. formosa L 


. tubiflora 

. tubiflora 
. tubiflora 


54609/5/87—1 M — L/4290 


GARRY L. DUFFIELD, Government Printer, Western Australia 








CONTENTS 


Page 

Collections of Lawrencia Hook, destroyed by fire, April 1984. By N. S. Lander. l 
Asteraceae specimens collected by Johann August Ludwig Preiss. By N. S. Lander. 9 

The distribution of introduced Rumex (Polygonaceae) in Western Australia. 

By J. Moore and J. K. Scott 21 

Ecology of Pinnaroo Valley Memorial Park, Western Australia: floristics and 

nutrient status. By W. Foulds 27 

Vegetation surveys near Lake MacLeod. By J. P. Tyler 49 

Time between germination and first flowering of some perennial plants 

By B. G. Muir 75 

The phytogeography, ecology and conservation status of Lechenaultia R.Br. 

(Goodeniaceae). By D. A. Morrison 85 


DATE OF PUBLICATION 

The date of publication of Kingia 1 ( 1 ) is 1988 as indicated on front cover, not 1987 as shown elsewhere.